Cadillac 2010 DTS 00 OI Preface 1..6 User Manual To The 7754863a 4b3e 4d3c B349 0590a66d91c4

User Manual: Cadillac 2010 DTS to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 486

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2010 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-18
3-22
3-36
3-40
3-48
3-55
3-57

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

2010 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath,
and the name DTS are registered trademarks
of General Motors.
This manual describes features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle either because they
are options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found
on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Cadillac Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.

Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com

Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25897010 B Second Printing

2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii

Safety Warnings and Symbols

A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this
happen.”

Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.

{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.

Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.

Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid

2 NOTES

Section 1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

In Brief
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-15
1-15
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-24

1-1

Instrument Panel

Console-Shift Model shown, Column-Shift Model similar
1-2

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑41.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑61.
C. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑25.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑46.
E. Horn on page 4‑3.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑120.
G. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
on page 3‑40 and Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4‑14 (If Equipped).
H. Analog Clock on page 4‑35.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
J. Audio System(s) on page 4‑88.

O. Hood Release on page 6‑13.
P. Parking Brake on page 3‑30.
Q. Heated Steering Wheel on page 4‑4
(If Equipped).
R. Cruise Control on page 4‑11 or Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 4‑14.
S. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3. Power Tilt Wheel and
Telescopic Steering Column on page 4‑4
(If Equipped).
T. Dual Climate Control System on page 4‑36.
U. Traction Control System Button (Console-Shift
Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑6.

K. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 3‑12.

V. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3‑27.

L. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑30.

W. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑34.

M. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 3‑46.

X. Glove Box on page 3‑55. Valet Lockout Switch on
page 3‑18.

N. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑5.

1-3

Initial Drive Information

Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press K
again within five seconds
to unlock all remaining
doors.

This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press

Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press and hold
open the trunk.

V for approximately one second to

L and release to locate the vehicle.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
Press

the panic alarm.
Press

L again to cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.

1-4

Remote Vehicle Start

Canceling a Remote Start

With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.

To cancel a remote start:
.

Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Turn the ignition on and then back off.

Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press

3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system
may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.

See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7.

Door Locks
From the outside, unlock the door using either the key
or the RKE transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs located at the top of the door panel
near the window.

1-5

Power Door Locks

Windows

On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
For more information, see:
.

Door Locks on page 3‑9.

Power Door Locks on page 3‑10.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4.

Trunk Release
In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE
transmitter, there is a remote release V button
located to the left of the steering wheel, next to the
instrument panel brightness control. Press to open
the trunk.
See Trunk on page 3‑12.

1-6

On vehicles with power windows, the switches are on
the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has a
switch that controls only that window.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up
to raise it.
For more information, see Power Windows on
page 3‑15.

Seat Adjustment

Power Reclining Seatbacks

Power Seats

The control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
The power seat controls
are on the outboard side
of the seat.

Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.

To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control forward or rearward.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑8.

Raise or lower the front or rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the front or rear of the control up or down.
See Power Seats on page 2‑3.

1-7

Power Lumbar Adjustment

Heated and Ventilated Seats

The control is located on the outboard side of the seat.

On vehicles with heated and ventilated seats, the
controls are located on the front doors and the ignition
must be on to use the feature.

z : Press to heat the seat and seatback.
+ : Press to heat the seatback.
H : Press to ventilate the seat and seatback.
For more information see Heated and Ventilated Seats
on page 2‑5.

Head Restraint Adjustment
Press the front or rear of the control to increase or
decrease lumbar support.
See Power Lumbar on page 2‑4.

The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head
restraints in the outboard seating positions.
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on
page 2‑2.

1-8

Safety Belt

Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver
airbags and roof‐rail airbags are not affected by this.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the overhead console when the vehicle is started.

Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑12.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑17.

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑26.

Lap Belt on page 2‑32.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑45.

United States

Canada

See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68 for
important information.

1-9

Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power folding mirrors are
located on the driver door
armrest.

The vehicle may also have an automatic dimming
feature on the driver side mirror that adjusts for the
glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is
controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
For more information, see:
.

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 3‑37

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑36

Interior Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror. Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights
from behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle
is started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑36.
Press the selector switch (A) or (B) to choose either the
left or right outside mirror. Then press the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired direction.
To fold the mirrors:
Press the selector switch (C) to fold the mirrors out,
then press (D) to fold the mirror toward the vehicle.

1-10

Steering Wheel Adjustment
This feature allows the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted.
The adjustment lever is
located on the left side of
the steering column.

For vehicles with a power tilt wheel control:

1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up
or down.
2. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Push the control up or down to tilt the steering
wheel up or down.

Push the control forward or rearward to move the
steering wheel toward the front or rear of the
vehicle.

See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3 or Power Tilt Wheel
and Telescopic Steering Column on page 4‑4
(If Equipped).

1-11

Interior Lighting

Exterior Lighting
This control is located on
the instrument panel, to
the left of the steering
wheel.

Courtesy Lamps
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or
when any door is opened and it is dark outside.

Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console on the headliner and in the rear door opening.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on
or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
For more information, see:

P: Turns off the exterior lamps, except Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps at normal
brightness, other exterior lamps and IntelliBeam™ .
;: Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
exterior lamps.
2: Manual operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑30.

Entry Lighting on page 4‑31.

For more information, see:

Parade Dimming on page 4‑31.

Exterior Lamps on page 4‑25.

Footwell Lamps on page 4‑32.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑29.

Fog Lamps on page 4‑30.

Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4‑28.

1-12

Press to turn on the fog lamps.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

6: Slow wipes.
1: Fast wipes.
9: Turns the wipers off.

J : Press and release this paddle, located at the top
of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer
fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑10 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑11.

The windshield wiper lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.

Delays wiping cycle.

1-13

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control System

Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles
with Rear Climate Control
A. Fan Control

E. Air Conditioning

B. Display

F. Outside Air or AUX

C. Air Delivery
Mode Control

G. Air Recirculation

D. Driver and
Passenger
Temperature
Controls

H. PASS (Passenger
Climate Control)
I. Rear Window
Defogger

See Dual Climate Control System on page 4‑36.
For vehicles with rear climate control, see Rear Climate
Control System on page 4‑42.

1-14

Vehicle Features
Radio(s)

a : Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨ : Press to seek or scan stations.
4 (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3/WMA, and RDS
Features): Press this button to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM
station, or MP3/WMA song. When information is not
available, No Info displays.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑88.

Storing a Favorite Station

Radio with CD

Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with an XM radio, a maximum of
36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs
and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six
favorite stations available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM,
or XM stations.
See Radio(s) (MP3) on page 4‑93.

BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.
The selection displays.

1-15

Setting the Clock
The vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. To use
the digital radio clock and the analog clock, see detailed
instructions in Setting the Clock on page 4‑89 for your
specific audio system.
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize both
clocks.

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock
(Single CD Player)
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting
menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and date
settings appear.

1-16

4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle
the radio clock display on or off.

Setting the Time and Date
(Single CD Player)
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located below any one of the
tabs that you want to change.
4. Increase or decrease the time or date by
turning a clockwise or counterclockwise.

Satellite Radio

Steering Wheel Controls

XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.

If equipped, these
controls are located on
the right side of the
steering wheel.

A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
.

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)

www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) (MP3)
on page 4‑93.

Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input, located on the
audio faceplate. External devices such as iPod®, laptop
computers, MP3 players, CD changers, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under Radio(s)
(MP3) on page 4‑93.

w : Press to go to the next radio station stored as a
favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press
again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than
two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth®
systems.
e − e : Increases or decreases volume.
c x : Press to go to the previous radio station stored
+

as a favorite, the next track if a CD/DVD is playing, to
reject an incoming call, or end a current call.

1-17

SRCE : Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for
vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

¨:

Press seek the next radio station, or to select
tracks on a CD or DVD.

For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑120.

Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used
in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions.
For more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑110.

1-18

Navigation System
The vehicle's navigation system provides detailed maps
of most major freeways and roads throughout the
United States and Canada. After a destination has been
set, the system provides turn-by-turn instructions for
reaching the destination. In addition, the system can
help locate a variety of points of interest (POI), such
as banks, airports, restaurants, and more.
See the vehicle's Navigation System manual for more
information.

Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of
many vehicle systems and enables access to the
personalization menu.

Press to reset certain DIC features and to
acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them
from the DIC display.

yz:

Press to scroll up and down the menu items.

For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑61.

Vehicle Customization
Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the
DIC buttons on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. These features include:

The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.

3 : Press to scroll through the trip and fuel displays.
T : Press to scroll through the vehicle information

Language

Door Lock and Unlock Settings

Lighting

Chime Volume

Memory Settings

Remote Start

See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79.

displays.

Press to customize the feature settings on your
vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79
for more information.

1-19

Cruise Control

Power Outlets
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left
side of the steering wheel.

The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is
located inside the lower storage area. Some vehicles
may have an outlet on the right front lower part of the
driver's seat and under the climate control system next
to the ashtray.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat
area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.
To use the outlet, remove the cover.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑34.

Turns on the cruise control system.

+ RES: Press to accelerate or resume speed.
SET– : Press to set the speed.

Press to cancel cruise control.

For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑11.
For vehicles with adaptive cruise control, see Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4‑14.

1-20

Performance and Maintenance

Tire Pressure Monitor

Traction Control System (TCS)

This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).

The traction control system limits wheel spin.
The system turns on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
.

To turn off traction control, press and release i in
front of the shift lever. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is displayed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66.

Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.

For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑6.

StabiliTrak®

The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.

The vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system that
assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns on automatically
every time the vehicle is started. The system cannot be
turned off.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑5.

1-21

You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑62 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑63.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. The kit can be used to
seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6‑77 for
complete operating information.

1-22

Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset to 100% only
following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the DIC INFO button until
OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
3. Press and hold the DIC INFO RESET button until
100% displays.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.

Driving for Better Fuel Economy

Roadside Service

Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112

Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.

Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.

Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

Combine several trips into a single trip.

Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.

Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
As the owner of a new Cadillac, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Service program which is
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Roadside Service and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Service, and relay exact location to
get you the help you need.

Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

1-23

OnStar®

How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X:
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.

1-24

Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.

Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy.

This information usually includes the vehicle's GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that the vehicle was
involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the virtual advisor feature of OnStar
hands-free calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle's GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.

1-25

OnStar Steering Wheel Controls

Your Responsibility

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑120 for
more information.

Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.

1-26

If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.

Section 2

Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Massaging Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel . . . . . . 2-6
Power Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint
in a Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint
in the Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint
in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . .
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-41
2-44
2-45
2-51
2-53
2-54
2-58
2-61
2-63
2-65
2-65
2-66
2-68
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-75
2-76

2-1

Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.

2-2

Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard side of
the seats.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.

Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.

Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.

Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.

The head restraints are not designed to be removed.

The front seats also have power reclining seatbacks.
See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑8.
On vehicles with the memory feature, memory settings
can be programmed and recalled for seat positions.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on
page 2‑6.
2-3

Power Lumbar

Massaging Lumbar
The power lumbar
controls are located on
the outboard side of the
front seats.

Press the front or rear of the lumbar control to increase
or decrease support. Press the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the support mechanism.

2-4

On vehicles with this
feature, the switch is
located on the outboard
side of the front seats
behind the lumbar switch.

Press the switch to turn the massaging lumbar feature
on. The ignition must be on for this feature to work.
The massage cycle will run for up to 10 minutes.
To stop massage, press the massaging lumbar
switch again or press the power lumbar switch.

Heated and Ventilated Seats
On vehicles with heated and ventilated seats, the
ignition must be on to use the feature.
The buttons are located
on the front doors.

Press each button to turn on the desired feature. A light
on that button will display indicating which feature is on.
There are three temperature settings for each feature.
A column of three lights next to the buttons will display
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or low.
Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights
indicate medium and one light indicates the lowest
setting.
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will decrease one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until the
display lights turn off.

Driver's Side Buttons
shown
J (Heated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Press this
button to heat the seat cushion and seatback.
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to heat the
seatback.
H (Ventilated Seat Cushion and Seatback): Press this
button to cool the seat cushion and seatback.

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is
cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
When the key is inserted into the ignition and the
ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn
off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the
desired button.

2-5

Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel

To save positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the
steering wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the previous steps
and pressing button 2 for a second driver.

On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are
located on the driver door panel. The controls are used
to program and recall memory settings for the driver
seat, outside mirror, and steering wheel position if
the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature.

2-6

To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,
outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move to the
position previously stored for the identified driver.
You will hear a single beep.

If you use the RKE transmitter to enter the vehicle and
the remote recall memory feature is on, automatic seat
and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4‑79 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror
buttons.
If something has blocked the driver seat and/or the
steering column while recalling a memory position, the
driver seat and/or the steering column recall may stop.
If this happens remove the obstruction, then press the
appropriate control for the area that is not recalling for
two seconds. Try recalling the memory position again
by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the
memory position is still not recalling, see your dealer
for service.

Easy Exit Recall
The control for this feature is located on the driver door
panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit position can be
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear a
single beep. The driver seat will move back, and if the
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature, the power telescopic steering column will move
up and forward.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic
seat and power telescopic steering column movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79 for more information.
Further programming for automatic seat and steering
wheel movement can be done using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). You can select or not select
the following:
.

The easy exit recall feature

The memory seat recall feature

For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79.

2-7

Power Reclining Seatbacks
The seats have power
reclining seatbacks. Use
the vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the seat.

{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.

Press the control toward the rear of the vehicle to
recline the seatback.

Press the control toward the front of the vehicle to
raise the seatback.

2-8

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.

Center Seat

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.

The vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat
can be converted to a storage area by lowering the
seatback. See Center Flex Storage Unit on page 3‑56.

2-9

Rear Seats

Press a button to turn on the desired feature. A light on
that button will display to show which feature is on.

Heated Seats

Each feature has three temperature settings indicated
by three lights next to the buttons. The highest setting
shows three lights, two is medium and one is the
lowest.

Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must
be on.
The buttons are located
on the rear doors.

When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the
feature will go down one temperature setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until the
display lights turn off.

I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.

2-10

Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass‐through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
Pass‐Through Door” under Trunk on page 3‑12.

The rear lumbar support
controls are located on
the rear doors in front of
the heated seat buttons.

Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard
rear seat positions.

To turn on the lumbar support feature, press the front of
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up and
down to adjust the location of the support.

2-11

Safety Belts

{ WARNING:

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.

{ WARNING:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.

2-12

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑48
for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.

2-13

Put someone on it.

2-14

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

2-15

Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

2-16

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑33 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑37. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.

2-17

In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

2-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.

2-19

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.

2-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

2-21

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

2-22

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

2-23

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

2-24

Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

2-25

Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position
(if equipped), which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 2‑32 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature
in the right front seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑68 for more
information.

2-26

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑33.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section for instructions on use and important
safety information.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety
belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.

2-27

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Safety Belt Pretensioners

The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.

This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Press the release
button (A) and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
The adjuster can be
moved up by pushing
up on the shoulder belt
guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pressing the release button to
make sure it has locked into position.

2-28

Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑76.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides for each outside passenger position in the
rear seat. If not, they are available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed the comfort guide positions
the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
rear side of the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

2-29

{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

2-30

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described earlier in this section. Make sure that the
shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
pocket on the side of the seatback.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-31

Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑26.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2‑33.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.

2-32

Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.

Safety Belt Extender

Child Restraints

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.

Older Children

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take
the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.

2-33

The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
.

Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑26 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.

Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length
of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.

2-34

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑26.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.

2-35

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

2-36

Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.

2-37

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

2-38

{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.

2-39

Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

2-40

{ WARNING:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.

{ WARNING:
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.

2-41

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly
in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the instructions that
came with that child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.

2-42

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑45 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when
no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint

{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.

2-43

Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68
for additional information.

2-44

{ WARNING:

Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)

A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always better
to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.

The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.

2-45

Lower Anchors

Top Tether Anchor

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.

2-46

Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.

To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.

j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.

Rear Seat

2-47

The top tether anchors are located under the covers on
the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑44 for additional
information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System

{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.

2-48

{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1. 1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1. 3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.

2-49

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2. 1. Find the top tether anchor.
2. 2. Pull open the top tether anchor cover to
expose the anchor.

If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head
restraint.

2. 3. If you have an adjustable headrest or head
restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint.
2. 4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the headrest
or head restraint.

If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

2-50

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑45 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.

If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑44.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

2-51

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

2-52

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑45 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.

{ WARNING:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.

2-53

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑44.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑68 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑49 for more information, including
important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

2-54

If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑45 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑49.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.

2-55

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

2-56

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑68 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed
the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

2-57

Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.

A frontal airbag for the driver.

A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.

A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.

The vehicle may also have the following airbags:
.

A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.

A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.

2-58

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:

{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑63.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.

{ WARNING:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.

2-59

{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑33 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑37.

2-60

There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑48 for
more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger's side.

2-61

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

2-62

{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block
the inflation path of a seat-mounted side
impact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or
tie down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag
will be blocked.

2-63

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.

If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.

If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does
not deform.

If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the right
front passenger's seat. The passenger seat position
sensor and passenger safety belt buckle switch provide
information that is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
2-64

sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment
occurs.
Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag
that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity,
seat location, and safety belt status using electronic
frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors which
enable the sensing system to monitor the position of
the front passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates
to a reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a
forward position. For more rearward front seating
positions, the passenger airbag may inflate to an
increased depth (a full deployment), based on safety
belt status and the crash severity measured early
in the event. (Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal airbags.)
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.
Your vehicle may have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag
System on page 2‑58. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to
severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy
when either side of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined
by the location and severity of the side impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑63 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.

2-65

What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑65.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.

2-66

{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.

{ WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
.

Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.

The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑19.

Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.

2-67

Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
are visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a
distance, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,
or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑49.

2-68

The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and
the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

WARNING: (Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.

{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
(Continued)

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag if:
.

The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.

The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.

The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.

A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.

The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.

Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.

2-69

When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑49.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat‐mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.

2-70

{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑48
for more information, including important safety
information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑54.

5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer.

2-71

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant

If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.

2-72

Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.

Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8‑17.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by
GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑74 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.

{ WARNING:

{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.

2-73

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger's position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,

2-74

installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑68.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get
a new one right away.

Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑48 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑65. See your dealer
for service.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑48 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑99.

2-75

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as soon
as possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new
LATCH system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑48.

2-76

Section 3

Features and Controls

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Valet Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-26
3-27
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-39

3-1

Section 3

Features and Controls

Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist
(UFRPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

3-40
3-40
3-43
3-46
3-48
3-49

Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Flex Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-55
3-55
3-55
3-56
3-56
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-57

Keys

{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.

The master key is used for the driver door, ignition, and
glove box.
The valet key is used for the driver door and ignition.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 8‑7.

3-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.

Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.

Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.

If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

3-4

With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the engine
from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7 for additional
information.

Q (Lock):

Press to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again within
five seconds. See DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 4‑79 for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑19.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
If K is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay
on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79. Pressing K may
disarm the content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑19.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):

Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.

Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will
be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel on page 2‑6 and DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79 for more information.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The transmission
must be in P (Park).

3-5

Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is programmed
to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also
be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters no
longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See RELEARN REMOTE KEY
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑61.

Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch, located above the
metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter.

3-6

Remote Vehicle Start
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to
start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also
starts up the vehicle's automatic climate control system.
When the remote start system is active, the climate
control system will heat and cool the inside of the
vehicle according to the previous settings of the system
before turning the vehicle off. The rear window defogger
will be turned on by the climate control system when
it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they
will also turn on when it is cold outside. See Heated
and Ventilated Seats on page 2‑5 for additional
information. Cooled seats are not activated during a
remote start. Normal operation of the climate control
system will return after the key is turned to ON/RUN.
See Dual Climate Control System on page 4‑36.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4 for
additional information.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter's
remote start button until the turn signal lights
flash or if the vehicle's lights are not visible,
press and hold the remote start button for at least
four seconds. Pressing the remote start button
again after the vehicle has started will turn off the
ignition.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will
turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
The vehicle's doors will be locked.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.

3-7

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
To manually shut off a remote start:
.

Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running
that may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press
and release the transmitter lock button and then press
and hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter
again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time
has expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining
minutes. For example, if the lock button and then
the remote start buttons are pressed again after
five minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes are
added and you now have 15 minutes of engine running.
The added ten minutes are considered a second remote
vehicle start.

3-8

Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
with the ignition key before you can use the remote start
feature again.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there
is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil
pressure is too low.
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system
may be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79 for additional
information.
See Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34 for important safety
information when using remote start in a closed garage.

Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start ready
feature. This feature allows your dealer to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature. See your
dealer if you would like to add the manufacturer's
remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle.

Doors and Locks

WARNING: (Continued)

Door Locks
.

{ WARNING:

Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.

Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if
the doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
(Continued)

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, you
must unlock the doors with the key or RKE transmitter
to avoid setting off the alarm.
From the outside, use either the key or the
RKE transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located
at the top of the door panel near the window.
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the knob.

3-9

Central Door Unlocking System
The vehicle has a central door unlocking mode.
When unlocking the driver door, the other doors can be
unlocked at the same time by turning the key clockwise
in the door lock cylinder twice.

Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches on the front doors
can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press

If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
P (Park), have the person use the manual lock knob or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lock knob
or power door lock switch to lock the door.
The door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These
prompts allow the driver to choose various lock and
unlock settings. For programming information, see DIC
Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79.

Rear Door Security Locks

to lock the doors.

Rear door security locks prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.

Programmable Automatic
Door Locks

The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. The rear doors must be opened
to access them.

The vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved
out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock every time the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is moved into P (Park).

3-10

To assist in finding the lock, the vehicle has the
following:

To open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout Protection
To use the lock:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.

If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock
and then the driver door will unlock. It is always
recommended that the ignition key is removed from
the vehicle when locking the doors.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds or
longer.

3-11

Trunk

{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.

Close all of the windows.

Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.

Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.

If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.

For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
3-12

Remote Trunk Release
V (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk
release button is located to the left of the steering
wheel next to the instrument panel brightness control.
Press the button to open the trunk. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet lockout switch
must be off to use this button.
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on
the RKE transmitter to open the trunk. To disable this
feature, see Valet Lockout Switch on page 3‑18.
The trunk can be accessed using the Rear Seat
Pass-Through. See “Rear Seat Pass-Through” following
this section.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle to open the trunk from the inside.

Rear Seat Pass‐Through
The vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This door
allows access to the trunk from inside the vehicle.
The rear seat armrest must be down for the
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through
door, move the release up. To close the door, raise it
and push it until it latches.

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

3-13

Windows

{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.

3-14

Power Windows

{ WARNING:

The power window
switches are located on
the driver door.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for up
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the ignition
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑24.

3-15

Express-Down/Up Windows
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to
be raised and lowered all the way without holding the
switch.
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature.
The express mode can be canceled at any time by
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.

Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express‐up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a preset factory
position. Weather conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to auto‐reverse. The
window will return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti‐Pinch Override

{ WARNING:
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could be damaged.
Before you use express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are clear of the
window path.
In an emergency, the anti‐pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position.
The window will rise for as long as the switch is
held. Once the switch is released, the express
mode is re‐activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.

3-16

Programming the Power Windows

Window Lockout

If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.

o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button
is located on the driver door near the window switches.

To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.

Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.

2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.

Sun Visors

3. Pull the power window switch up until the window
is fully closed.

Swing down the visor to block out glare. The visors also
have side-to-side slide capability.

4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.

Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.
The light will come on when the cover is opened. It will
go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has the
adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or down
to brighten or dim the light.

3-17

Rear Power Sunshade

Theft-Deterrent Systems

If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the rear
window.

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.

The switch is located on
the overhead console.

Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.

The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf.
It only works while the ignition is on or while the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑24.
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release
the switch again.
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may
get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in your
vehicle.
3-18

9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn the lockout
feature off. When the lockout feature is off, you can
open the trunk using either the keyless entry transmitter
or the trunk release button located near the headlamp
switch on the instrument panel.

— (On): Press this side of the button to turn the lockout
feature on. When the lockout feature is turned on,
the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless entry
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.

Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.

If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4 and Trunk on page 3‑12 for additional
information.

To arm the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch
with the door open or the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The security light will flash.
3. Close all the doors. The security light will come on
and stay on for approximately 30 seconds.
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a RKE
transmitter the horn will sound and the lamps will flash
for about 30 seconds.

3-19

The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It arms
only if you use a power door lock with the door open or
the RKE transmitter.
To avoid arming the alarm by accident:
.

Lock the vehicle with the door key or the manual
door lock.

Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE
transmitter system. Pressing the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter, or unlocking a door with the
key disarms the content theft-deterrent system.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the
alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.

If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver's
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by
using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter system,
or by starting the car with a valid key.
Changes or modifications made to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use the theft system.

3-20

Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the
RKE system and close the door. Wait 30 seconds
until the security lamp goes off.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the hazard lights will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver's door
with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑106. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
®

Your vehicle has PASS-Key III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from
the LOCK/OFF position.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on when trying to start the vehicle, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑106. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.

3-21

See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a

1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the original key to LOCK/OFF.

Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.

Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.

Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑26 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.

The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.

3-22

Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and transmission and steering column.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio
and windshield wipers operate while the engine is off.
To use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

In order to shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.

3-23

C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns to
after the vehicle is started. This position displays some
of the warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER DOOR OPEN when
the driver door is opened if the ignition is in LOCK/OFF,
ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for more
information.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
.

Audio System

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Power Windows

Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to these accessories will work up to 10 minutes
or until the driver's door is opened. For an additional
10 minutes of power, close all the doors and turn the
key to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF.

Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position. To restart
the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.

3-24

Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will slow
down as the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.

2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-25

Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver side of
the engine, behind the transmission dipstick/fluid
fill location and next to the engine.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area
where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice
on this.

3-26

Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located either on the steering column or on the console
between the seats.

{ WARNING:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑31. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑26.

There are several different positions for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply the regular brakes before you can shift from
P (Park) while the ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 3‑32.

3-27

R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also use this gear to rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the
transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑17 for additional
information.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.

3-28

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy for the vehicle. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.

Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear
and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 5‑10.
Notice: Driving the vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have the
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
2 (Second) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and D (Drive) for higher speeds until then.

See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑26 for more
information.

1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.

3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed more
than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use
2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use the brakes off and on.

Performance Shifting

D (Drive) can be used for towing. You may want to shift
the transmission to 3 (Third) or, if necessary, to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions.

Notice: Do not shift into 2 (Second) unless you are
going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage the engine and/or transmission.

If the vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in
driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving
maneuver, the vehicle's transmission automatically
shifts to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle
performance. The vehicle will automatically return to
normal operation when you return to normal driving
patterns.

3-29

Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located to the left of the
regular brake pedal, near
the driver door.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light will come on and stay
on until the parking brake is released. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 4‑51 for more
information.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down.
When you lift your foot off the parking brake pedal, the
pedal will follow your foot to the released position.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down, then push the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does
not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.

3-30

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑26.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑26.

Steering Column Shift Lever
If the vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):

3. With your foot still holding the brake pedal down,
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 3‑30 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).

Console Shift Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use
this procedure to shift the vehicle into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle and
then to the left.
3. While keeping the brake pedal applied, set the
parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑30
for more information.

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as
it will go.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).

3-31

Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. See Parking
Brake on page 3‑30 for more information.

Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too
much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and
then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park).

3-32

To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park). To find out how, see “Shifting Into
Park” in this section.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of Park
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
.

Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park)

Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.

The shift lock is always functional except in the case of
a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑40.

Console Shift
If the console shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)
1. Apply the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. See Ignition Positions on page 3‑23 for
more information.
3. Push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).
4. Then, shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.

Column Shift
If the column shift cannot be moved out of P (Park)
1. Apply the regular brakes.

3. Shift out of the P (Park) position to the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Move the column shift to the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{ WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position. See Ignition Positions on
page 3‑23 for more information.

3-33

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.

The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.

The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
(Continued)

3-34

WARNING: (Continued)
.

The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.

There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
.

Drive it only with the windows
completely down.

Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.

{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
the parking brake after you move the shift lever to
P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑31.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 5‑26.

3-35

Mirrors

Compass

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Compass Operation
Press O or AUTO 3, depending on the vehicle, to

The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror with a compass display. Automatic dimming
reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle.
The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light
illuminates each time the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off):

Press and hold O for about three seconds
to turn the dimming feature and compass display on
or off.

AUTO 3 (Vehicles with Intellibeam™):

Press
and hold for approximately three seconds to turn the
compass display on or off. See Exterior Lamps on
page 4‑25 for more information.

Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.

turn the compass on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, after
a few seconds, the mirror will display the compass
heading. The compass automatically calibrates as the
vehicle is driven.

Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds, the display does not show the
correct direction, (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar
magnetic item.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding O or AUTO 3,
depending on the vehicle, until a C is shown in the
compass display.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.

3-36

Compass Variance
The compass is set to zone eight. If you do not live
in zone eight or drive out of the area, the compass
variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.

3. Once the zone number displays, press O or
AUTO 3 repeatedly until the correct zone
number displays. Stop pressing the button and the
mirror will return to normal operation. If C appears
in the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door
armrest.

Press the selector switch (A) or (B) to choose either the
left or right outside mirror. Then press the control pad to
move the mirror to the desired direction.
2. Press and hold O or
number displays.

AUTO 3 until a zone
3-37

Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to unfold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors toward the vehicle.

Turn Signal Indicator (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that
is built into the mirror. The turn signal lamp flashes with
the use of the vehicle's turn signal and hazard flashers.

Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:

If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the
automatic dimming rearview mirror.

The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.

They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.

The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded position.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.

If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3‑43 for more information.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror
controls to reset them to their normal position. A noise
may be heard during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual
folding operation.

3-38

Park Tilt Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it is
capable of performing the park tilt mirror feature. This
feature allows the driver and passenger side mirror to
tilt to a factory programmed position when the vehicle is
in R (Reverse). This feature may be useful in allowing
you to view the curb when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and
either a five-second delay has occurred, or the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver and passenger side
mirror will return to its original position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79 for more information.

Outside Convex Mirror

{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.

Outside Heated Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Climate Control System on page 4‑36 for more
information.

3-39

Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking
Assist (UFRPA) system, it operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5mph), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects. It can determine how close objects are
to the front bumper, up to 1.2 m (4 ft.) in front of the
vehicle and the rear bumper, up to 2.5 m (8 ft.) behind
the vehicle. The distance sensors are located on the
front and rear bumper.

3-40

{ WARNING:
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park Assist
(UFRPA) system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
.

objects that are below the bumper, underneath
the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from
the vehicle

children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper care before moving
forward and while backing; vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with UFRPA, always
check in front of the vehicle before moving
forward and behind the vehicle before backing up.
While moving forward and backing, be sure to
look for objects and check the vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park). The system does not work at a
forward or reverse speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
To be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.)
off the ground and below hood or trunk level. Objects
must also be within 1.2 m (4 ft.) in front of the vehicle
and 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the rear bumper. This distance
may be less during warmer or humid weather.

Front Parking Assist
Display

Rear Parking Assist
Display

The front display is located on top of the instrument
panel to the right of the driver. The front display will
have either three or six lights to provide distance and
system information. With Adaptive Cruise control (ACC),
it will have three lights along with the ACC lights.
Without ACC, it will have six lights. High-toned beeps
from the front speakers are for objects detected near
the front bumper.
The rear display is located near the rear window
and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder.
The rear display uses three color-coded lights to
provide distance and system information. Low-toned
beeps from the rear speakers are for the rear bumper.

When backing up, if objects are detected at the same
time near both the front and rear bumpers, both
color-coded light displays will notify you of objects close
to each bumper. If there are objects detected near both
bumpers, the beeps will only be sounded to notify that
objects are close to the rear bumper. However, if while
the vehicle is backing up and an object comes within
0.3 m (1 ft.) of the front bumper, and at the same time
there is another object further than 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the
rear bumper, then the beeps will only be sounded to
notify you of the closer object that is near the front
bumper.
The system can be disabled using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist”
under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑61
for more information.

3-41

Moving Forward

Backing

When the vehicle is started, the front display will briefly
illuminate to let you know the system is working.

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) comes on
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). The rear display will then briefly illuminate
to let you know the system is working.

The following describes what will occur with the front
display as you get closer to a object detected in the
front of the vehicle:
Description
amber/amber lights
ACC — one amber light
four amber lights
ACC — two amber lights
four amber/ two red lights
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light
four amber/ two red lights
flashing and beep for
five seconds
ACC — two amber
lights/one red light flashing
and beep for five seconds

3-42

Metric

English

1.2 m

4 ft

1.0 m

40 in

0.6 m

23 in

0.3 m

1 ft

The following describes what will occur with the rear
display as you get closer to an object detected in the
rear of your vehicle:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights and
continuous beeping for
five seconds
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and continuous
beeping for five seconds

Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m

English
8 ft.
40 in.

0.6 m

23 in.

0.3 m

1 ft.

The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑61 for more
information.

When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved
into R (Reverse). This occurs under the following
conditions:
.

The driver disables the system.

The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice
and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑100.

A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.

A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.

The vehicle's bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer to repair the system.

Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system. Read this entire section before using the
system.

{ WARNING:
SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not
replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect:
.

Vehicles outside the side blind zones which
may be rapidly approaching.

Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

Failure to use proper care when changing lanes
may result in damage to the vehicle, injury,
or death. Always check the outside and rearview
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the
turn signal before changing lanes.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, amber SBZA displays will light up in the side
mirrors. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change
lanes. Before making a lane change, always check the

If the system is still disabled after driving forward at
least 25 km/h (15 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer.
3-43

SBZA display, check the outside and rearview mirrors,
look over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards, and
use the turn signal.

The SBZA detection zones do not change if the vehicle
is towing a trailer. So be extra careful when changing
lanes while towing a trailer.

How the System Works

Left Side Mirror Display

SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one
lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m (11 ft).
This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5 m (16 ft). The height of the zone is
approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off
the ground.

3-44

Right Side Mirror Display

When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays
will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. While driving forward, the left or right side
mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected
in that blind zone. If you activate a turn signal and a
vehicle has been detected on the same side, the SBZA
display will flash to give you extra warning not to
change lanes.
SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is
approaching or passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater then 20 mph (32 km/h), SBZA displays may
come on when a vehicle you have passed remains
in or drops back into the detection zone.

SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑61 for more information. If the SBZA is disabled
by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will not light up
during normal driving.

When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal
circumstances and will increase in wet conditions.
The system does not need to be serviced due to an
occasional missed alert. The number of missed alerts
will increase with increased rainfall or road spray.

The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is
attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or object is
extending out to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the
driver turning it off, the driver will not be able to turn
SBZA back on using the DIC. The SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the conditions
for normal system operation are not met. Until normal
operating conditions for SBZA are met, you should not
rely upon SBZA while driving.

SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may appear in the DIC:

If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is
on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may
need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This
message indicates that the driver has turned the
system off.

SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects; however,
the system may occasionally light up due to guard
rails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal system operation, the vehicle does not
need service.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE: This
message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled
because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone. The sensor may be blocked
by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even heavy
rainstorms. This message may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not
need service. For cleaning, see Washing Your Vehicle
on page 6‑100.

SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners of
the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6‑100. If the DIC
still displays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper,
see your dealer.

3-45

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM: If this
message appears, both SBZA displays will remain on
indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after continued driving, the
system needs service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.

FCC Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for FCC
information.
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak
(0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 m.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV
interference caused by unauthorized modifications to
this equipment. Such modifications could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.

3-46

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
The vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system. Read this entire section before using
the system.

{ WARNING:
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system does
not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help you
stay in your driving lane. The LDW system
may not:
.

Provide you with enough time to avoid a lane
change collision.

Be loud enough for you to hear the warning
beeps.

Work properly under bad weather conditions
or if the windshield is not kept clean.

Detect lane markings and will not detect road
edges.

Warn you that your vehicle is crossing a lane
marking if the system does not detect the lane
marking.
(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)
LDW will indicate the system is working whenever
it detects either the left or right lane marking. So if
you depart on the side of the lane that LDW is not
detecting, LDW will not warn you.
If you do not carefully maintain your vehicle
position within the lane, vehicle damage, injury,
or death could occur. Even with LDW, always
keep your attention on the road and maintain
proper vehicle position within the lane. Always
keep the windshield clean and do not use LDW in
bad weather conditions.
When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, the
LDW symbol will flash and you will hear three beeps.
LDW will not warn you if the turn signal is on or if you
make a sharp maneuver. Before making a lane change,
check the vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder
for vehicles and hazards, and start the turn signal
before changing lanes.

How the System Works
LDW uses a camera located between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield to detect the lane
markings.

@ (Lane Departure Warning): To turn LDW on
and off, press the LDW control, located by the exterior
headlamp control. An indicator on the control will light to
indicate that LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, the LDW symbol, located
in the instrument panel cluster, will briefly come on to
indicate that the light is operational.
LDW only operates at speeds of 35 mph (56 km) or
greater. If LDW is turned on when traveling at these
speeds, the LDW symbol will appear green if the
system detects a left or right lane marking.
3-47

This symbol will change to amber and flash and three
beeps will sound if you cross a detected lane marking
without using the turn signal.
If the LDW symbol does not appear, LDW is not
currently operating and will not warn you.
To change the volume of the warning chime, see Chime
Volume under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 4‑79
for more information.

When the System Does Not Seem To Work
Properly
The LDW symbol will not appear when the system is
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if the
view of the camera on the windshield is blocked with
mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is
damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such as
while driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions. This is
normal operation, the vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑100.
LDW warnings may occasionally occur due to tar
marks, shadows, cracks in the road, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system operation, the
vehicle does not need service.

3-48

LDW Error Message
SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM: This
message may appear in the DIC to indicate that LDW is
not working properly. If this message remains on after
continued driving, the system needs service. Take your
vehicle to your dealer.
LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE : This
message may appear in the DIC if LDW does not
activate due to a temporary condition.

Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.

Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)

Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when
the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.

This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.

This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.

3-49

Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.

3-50

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps in less than
30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what
was used for the garage door opener.

If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.

Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.

3-51

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of the garage door opener motor. If there are
a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above,
the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit.
If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to
the previous section for Programming Universal
Home Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-52

The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
the original hand held transmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.

When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”

When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”

If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure
to enter the switch settings written down in
Step 2, in order from left to right, into the
Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.

The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
.

A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”

A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-53

5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:

3-54

If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.

If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.

If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.

To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.

Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.

Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up the glove box handle to open it. Use the key to
lock and unlock the glove box.

Cupholders
There are cupholders located in the full floor console,
or in the front of the center seat console. Cupholders
are also located in the rear armrest. Slide the cover
back to access the full floor console cupholder. Fold
open the front of the console to access the center seat
console cupholder.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6.

3-55

Front Storage Area

Center Flex Storage Unit

To access the front storage area, push down and then
release. Push up and forward to remove.

This vehicle may have a center flex storage unit that
includes a front center seat with a lap belt and an
underseat storage compartment. The center seatback
can also be used as an armrest. Cupholders are also
located at the front edge of the storage unit and can be
accessed by folding the compartment forward.

Center Console Storage
If the vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage
areas. Lift the left lever located in the front of the
armrest lid to access the upper storage tray. Lift the
right lever to access the lower storage area. If the
vehicle has a center seat console it will have two
storage areas. Press the button located on the front of
the armrest and lift the armrest cover to access the
upper storage area. Pull the strap located behind the
cup holder to access the lower storage area.

3-56

Pull the handle rearward to open a storage
compartment and access the accessory power outlet.
Pull out to remove.
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be
stored in the underseat storage compartment.

Floor Mats

Sunroof

The driver's side floor mat is held in place by two hooks.

The vehicle may have a power sunroof.

Remove the floor mat by pulling up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect it from the hooks.
Reinstall the floor mat by lining up the openings in the
floor mat over the hooks and push it down into place.

The switches that operate
the sunroof are located on
the overhead console.

Properly place the driver's side floor mat on the floor so
that it does not block the movement of the accelerator
pedal.

Rear Seat Armrest
This vehicle has a rear seat armrest with cupholders.
Pull the tab on the armrest forward, to access it.

Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 3‑24.

3-57

Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver side
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than to the express-open
position, press the switch again, in either direction, to
stop the movement. If the sunshade is in the closed
position, it will open with the sunroof, or it can be
opened manually.
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold
the passenger side switch forward to vent the sunroof.
The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full
vent position. The sunshade must be opened manually.

3-58

Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
.

From the open position, press and hold the driver
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must
be closed manually.

From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger side sunroof switch rearward.

Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the
tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation,
noise or plug the water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from sunroof.

Section 4

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Footwell Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . .

4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-47
4-48
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-1

Section 4
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-2

Instrument Panel
4-52
4-53
4-53
4-54
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-58
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-60
4-60

Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Radio(s) (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Navigation/Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . 4-122

Instrument Panel Overview

Tilt Wheel

Hazard Warning Flashers

This feature allows the position of the steering wheel to
be adjusted.

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press

The adjustment lever is
located on the left side of
the steering column.

| again to turn the flashers off.

Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.

1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up
or down.
2. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

4-3

Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
If the vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt and
telescope wheel control is
located on the outboard
side of the steering
column.

Heated Steering Wheel
The vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The button for this feature
is located on the steering
wheel.

Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light
on the button displays while the feature is turned on.
Heating will begin in about three minutes.
Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel
up or down.
Press the control forward or rearward and the steering
wheel moves toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79 and Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2‑6.

4-4

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
2 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
L : Windshield Washer
Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.

For vehicles with the side blind zone alert system,
an arrow in the outside mirror flashes when the turn
signal is used. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3‑43 for more information.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete. If the lever is briefly pressed and released,
the turn signal will flash three times.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑106.
4-5

Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime sounds
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile as a
reminder to turn it off. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑66.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward to change the headlamps from low beam
to high. Pull the lever back and then release it to
change from high beam to low.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

4-6

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle too
quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a
visual alert with no audible alert if you are following
another vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol
is located on top of the instrument panel to the right of
the driver. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar
to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path, within
a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at speeds
above 20 mph (32 km/h).

{ WARNING:

WARNING: (Continued)
not provide you with enough time to avoid a
collision. FCA is not designed to warn the driver
of pedestrians or animals. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2.
The FCA control is
located on the steering
wheel.

FCA is only a warning system and does not apply
the brakes. When you are approaching a vehicle
or object too rapidly or when you are following a
vehicle too closely that is ahead of you, FCA may
(Continued)

4-7

To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise
Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4‑14.
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.
FCA is disabled when the indicator light is amber.

{ WARNING:
.

4-8

On winding roads, FCA may not detect a
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA on winding
roads.
When weather limits visibility, such as in fog,
rain, or snow, FCA performance is limited.
There may not be enough warning distance to
the vehicle in front of you. Do not rely on FCA
in low visibility conditions.

{ WARNING:
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another Adaptive
Cruise Control button, you might go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could be startled
and even lose control. Be careful not to press
adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use
cruise control.

Alerting the Driver
The FCA alert symbol will
flash and a warning beep
will sound when driver
action may be required.

The alert symbol will flash when:
.

Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle too
quickly.

Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of you
much too closely.

See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2 for more
information.

WARNING: (Continued)
when the radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning the
System” under Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4‑14.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your
driving lane.

{ WARNING:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a
vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a
collision under these conditions. Do not use FCA
(Continued)

{ WARNING:
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving vehicles
or other objects.

Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does not
need service.

4-9

Other Messages

Windshield Wipers

There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66.

The windshield wiper lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.

Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 4‑14.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
The flash-to-pass feature will only work with the
headlamps on. It does not work with Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
If the headlamps are on low beam, pulling the turn
signal towards you will flash the high beams.

4-10

Turn the band with the wiper symbol on it to control the
windshield wipers.
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, hold it on mist until
the wipers start, then release. The wipers stop after one
wipe. Several wipes, hold the band longer.

6 (Delay):

Use to set the delay time between wipe
cycles. The wiper speed can be set for a long or short
delay between wipes. The closer the band is set to the
top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.

The vehicle has wiper-activated headlamps. After the
windshield wipers have completed eight wipe cycles
within four minutes, the headlamps automatically turn
on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 4‑28 for
more information.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this paddle,
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,
to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers will
clear the windshield and either stop or return to the
preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold
the paddle.

Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). A cruise
control light appears in the instrument panel cluster
when the cruise control is on.

{ WARNING:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically turns off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑6. When road
conditions let you safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.

4-11

I (On):

Setting Cruise Control

Turns on the cruise control system.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.

{ WARNING:

SET– (Set): Press to set the speed.

If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.

[ (Cancel):

Press to cancel cruise control.

Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster comes
on after the cruise control has been set to the desired
speed.
1. Press

2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET– button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied. This shuts off the
cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES (resume/accelerate)
button to return to the desired preset speed. The cruise
light displays again.
4-12

The vehicle returns to and stays at the preset speed.
If you press and hold the +RES button, the vehicle
speed increases until the button is released or the
brake is applied. Do not hold in the +RES button, if you
do not want the vehicle speed to increase.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
.

Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET– button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle now
cruises at the higher speed.
Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release the
button. To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the +RES button and then
release it. Each time this is done, the vehicle
accelerates approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph).

The accelerate feature only works after the cruise
control speed is set by pressing the SET– button.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
.

Press the SET– button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.

To slow down in very small amounts, push the
SET– button briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle slows down approximately
1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previous cruise control
speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's
speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle's speed
down. Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear
ends cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or
4-13

shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill
slope, you might not want to attempt to use the cruise
control feature.

Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise Control
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

4-14

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an enhancement
to traditional cruise control. It allows you to keep
cruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditions
without having to constantly reset your cruise control.
ACC uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in
your path, within a distance of 100 m (330 ft), and
operates at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). When it
is engaged by the driver, the system can apply limited
braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically
to maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle
ahead. Braking is limited to 2.45 m/sec2 (0.25 g's)
of deceleration, which is comparable to moderate
application of the vehicle's brakes. To disengage ACC,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, the vehicle
will react like traditional cruise control.

{ WARNING:

WARNING: (Continued)

Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not have time to slow your vehicle
enough to avoid a collision. Your complete
attention is always required while driving and you
should be ready to take action and apply the
brakes. For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 5‑2.

Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to
slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash
when you are driving in conditions where
vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of
you, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle's
path. If you are driving in these conditions, do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning
beep and alert symbol may indicate that you
are driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used. See
“Alerting the Driver” in this section.

On slippery roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause needless wheel spinning, and you
could lose control. Do not use cruise control
on slippery roads.

When weather limits visibility, such as when in
fog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive Cruise
Control performance is limited. There may not
be enough distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.

{ WARNING:
.

On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.
(Continued)

4-15

−GAP (Decrease Following Distance): Press to
decrease the distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
ACC will not work if the master cylinder brake fluid level
is low.

Engaging ACC With the Set Button

{ WARNING:

The ACCs are located on the steering wheel.
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the
steering wheel.

] (On):

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch
on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not want
to. You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.

Press to turn the system on.

+ Res (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set speed or to increase
the set speed when ACC is already active.

The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed your vehicle will travel if there is no vehicle
detected in its path.

Set– : Press to set the speed or to decrease the set
speed when ACC is already active.

To set ACC, do the following:

[ (Cancel):

Press to cancel ACC.

+GAP (Increase Following Distance): Press to
increase the distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
4-16

1. Press the

] button.

2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the SET– button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Once ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if
it detects a vehicle ahead is too close or moving slower
than your vehicle.
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of the
instrument panel to the right of the driver. When the on
symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that ACC is
active.
A message on the DIC will also display when ACC is
set. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66.
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.
If the vehicle is in ACC when the traction control system
begins to limit wheel spin, the ACC will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑6 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
the ACC can be turned back on.

Increasing Set Speed While Using ACC
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
.

Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET– button and then release the button
and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now
cruise at the higher speed.

Press the +RES button. Hold it there until the
desired set speed is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), then release the switch.
To increase the set speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to +RES. Each time this is
done, the set speed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set
speed.

4-17

Decreasing Set Speed While Using ACC
Press the SET– button until you reach the lower speed
desired, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
SET– button. Each time this is done, the set speed
decreases by 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the ACC is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied. This will turn off the ACC.
But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button. ACC will
be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it
will adjust your vehicle's speed and maintain the follow
distance (gap) you select.
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel
to adjust the follow distance.

4-18

Press the plus button to increase the distance or the
minus button to decrease the distance. The first button
press shows the current follow distance setting on
the DIC. The current follow distance setting will be
maintained until it is changed.
There are six follow distances to choose from.
The follow distance selection ranges from near
to far (one second to two seconds follow time). The
distance maintained for a selected follow distance will
vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle
speed the further back your vehicle will follow. Consider
traffic and weather conditions when selecting the follow
distance. The range of selectable distances may not be
appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If you
prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than ACC
allows, disengage the system and drive manually.

Alerting the Driver
The ACC alert symbol is
located on the display at
the top of the instrument
panel to the right of the
driver.

A temporary condition prohibits ACC from
operating. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66 for more information.

A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for more
information.

See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.

{ WARNING:
The alert symbol flashes and a warning beep sounds
when driver action may be required. If ACC is engaged,
the alert symbol will flash when:
.

ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because you
are approaching a vehicle too rapidly.

The vehicle speed drops below about
32 km/h (20 mph).

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases,
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to
slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes
yourself. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.

4-19

Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
is located on the top of
the instrument panel to
the right of the driver.

The vehicle ahead symbol only appears when a vehicle
is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
ACC will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead.

4-20

{ WARNING:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a
vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not
have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid
a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
when the radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning the
System” later in this section.
ACC automatically slows your vehicle down when
approaching a slower moving vehicle. It then adjusts
your vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at the
selected follow distance. Your vehicle speed increases
or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but will
not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking,
if necessary. When braking is active, your brake lights
will come on. Braking may feel or sound different than if
you were applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow‐moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash into
an object ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control when approaching stationary or
slow‐moving vehicles or other objects.

{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may accelerate
toward objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes
lanes. Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes.

Low-Speed Deactivation
If your vehicle speed falls below 32 km/h (20 mph) while
following a vehicle ahead, ACC will begin to disengage.
The Driver Alert symbol will flash and the warning beep
will sound. The driver must take action since ACC will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.

Passing a Vehicle/ACC Override
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the system
will not automatically apply the brakes. A message will
appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑66. Once you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, ACC will return to normal operation
and be able to apply the brakes, if needed.

{ WARNING:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal
when using Adaptive Cruise Control.

4-21

Curves in the Road

{ WARNING:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in
your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes
if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may
reduce your vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.

4-22

When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC
could lose track of the vehicle in your lane and
accelerate your vehicle. When this happens the
Vehicle Ahead symbol will not appear.

Highway Exit Ramps

{ WARNING:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and
apply the brakes.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC may, occasionally, provide a driver alert and/or
braking that you consider unnecessary. It could respond
to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when
entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation.
Your vehicle does not need service.

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, ACC will
not detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself.

4-23

Using ACC on Hills and When Towing a
Trailer

Disengaging ACC
To turn off the system, apply the brake pedal, press the
cancel button, or press the ACC button.

Erasing Set Speed Memory
Press the ACC button or turn the ignition off.

Other Messages

How well ACC will work on hills and when towing a
trailer depends on your vehicle's speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It may
not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to use the
accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle's speed.
When going downhill, especially when towing a trailer,
you may want to brake to keep your speed down.
Applying the brake disengages the system. You may
choose not to use ACC on steep hills, especially when
towing a trailer.

There are three additional messages that may appear
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.
These messages will appear to indicate a problem
with the ACC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66 for more information.

Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens. Remember, do not use ACC in icy conditions,
or when visibility is low, such as in fog, rain or snow.
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a soft
cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage the
ACC. If you are unable to do so, see your dealer.

4-24

Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.

AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
.

Parking Lamps

Instrument Panel Lights

IntelliBeam™

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
It controls the following systems:

Instrument Panel Lights

License Plate Lamps

Headlamps

Taillamps

Side Marker Lamps

Parking Lamps

License Plate Lamps

Instrument Panel Lights

Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off):

Turns off the exterior lamps except for
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays on
while the parking lamps are on with the engine off and
the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the previously listed lamps. A warning chime sounds if
the driver's door is opened while the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to
turn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 4‑30.

4-25

IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
For vehicles with this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle's
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on
the rearview mirror, this system turns the vehicle's
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.

Driving with IntelliBeam™
IntelliBeam only activates the high-beams when driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h).
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the
automatic control of IntelliBeam, until any of the
following situations occur:
.

The system detects an approaching vehicle's
headlamps.

The IntelliBeam system turns the high-beam headlamps
on when it is dark enough, there is no other traffic
present, and the IntelliBeam system is enabled.

The system detects a preceding vehicle's
taillamps.

The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam™

The vehicle's speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h).

The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is
used. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 4‑6 and Flash-to-Pass on page 4‑10.

Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the inside
rear view mirror. The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror
turns on to indicate the system is on. Once the system
has been turned on, it remains on each time the vehicle
is started, but the IntelliBeam system must be enabled.
To enable the IntelliBeam system, turn the exterior lamp
control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever
in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light appears
on the instrument panel cluster when the high-beams
are on. See Highbeam On Light on page 4‑60.

4-26

When either of these conditions occur, the
IntelliBeam feature is disabled and the IntelliBeam
light in the mirror turns off until the high-beam stalk
is returned to the neutral position.
.

If IntelliBeam was using low-beams prior to this
action, the IntelliBeam feature is temporarily
disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral
position.

The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
When this occurs, IntelliBeam is disabled until the
control is turned back to the AUTO position.

The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.

IntelliBeam might not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle's lamps because of
any of the following:
.

The other vehicle's lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.

The other vehicle's lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow, and/or road spray.

The other vehicle's lamp(s) cannot be detected
due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road
spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.

Your vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked,
or obstructed by something that blocks the
view of the IntelliBeam light sensor.

Your vehicle's windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze, or other obstructions.

Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of
the vehicle points upward, causing the IntelliBeam
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and
taillamps.

You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

You might need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.

Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam™ at
the Rearview Mirror
IntelliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on the
inside rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (On/Off): Press this button on the inside
rearview mirror to disable the system. The IntelliBeam
indicator turns off and does not come back on until the
IntelliBeam button is pressed again.
When IntelliBeam has turned on the high-beams, pull or
push the high-beam stalk. This will disable IntelliBeam.
The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror turns off. To turn
IntelliBeam back on, press the IntelliBeam button on the
mirror.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam indicator light
flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this, the
vehicle' s setting automatically is reset when the ignition
is turned off and then on again.

4-27

Cleaning the IntelliBeam™ Light Sensor
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the
vehicle in front of the
inside rearview mirror.

Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on and have
completed eight wipe cycles within four minutes.
When the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, the
wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off.
The wiper-activated headlamps also turn off if the
windshield wipers are turned off.

Headlamps on Reminder
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glass
cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor window.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the
sensor window.

4-28

A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver's door is opened with the ignition off.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the turn signal lamps come on
when the following conditions are met:
.

It is still daylight and the ignition is on.

The exterior lamp control is in the off position.

The transmission is not in P (Park)
(United States only).

The light sensor is covered or not detecting light.
See “Sensors” under Dual Climate Control System
on page 4‑36.

When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough
outside, the regular lamps go off, and the DRL takes
over. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.
Once you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if there is light outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
knob is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 4‑30.
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog
lamps were turned on instead, the DRL will still
deactivate.

When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as the
parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL
are being used. The instrument panel will not be lit up
either.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off
automatic lighting and shift the transmission into
P (Park). Placing the vehicle in P (Park) disables the
DRL. The DRL will stay off until the vehicle is shifted
out of P (Park).

When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough
outside, the turn signal lamps turn off and normal
low-beam headlamp operation occurs.

To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or fog
lamps, if the vehicle has them.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.

4-29

Fog Lamps

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver

The fog lamps button is on the exterior lamps control to
the left of the steering column.

If the exterior lamp button has been left on, the exterior
lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned to LOCK/OFF and a door has been opened.
This protects against draining the battery if the
headlamps or parking lamps are accidentally left on.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF
and any door is opened.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps button to
turn the fog lamps on or off. A light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster when the fog lamps are in
use. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑46.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the
fog lamps to work.
The fog lamps will go off when the headlamps are
changed to high-beam.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.

Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps
or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with
the multifunction lever. They provide more light for
cornering.

4-30

Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel and
footwell lights, if equipped.
The button for this control is located below the exterior
lamps control.
Push the button in and release to extend the button.
Turn the button clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights.

Courtesy Lamps

Parade Dimming

The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or
when any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle
lamps are located on the bottom of the front and rear
door trim.
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp
and also opera lamps.

This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays
and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is
in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature is
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument
panel brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and
clockwise to brighten lighting.

Entry Lighting

Reading Lamps

This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the
backlighting for the door switches and the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if the remote keyless
entry transmitter unlock button is pressed. If activated
due to the transmitter, the lighting remains active for
about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting system uses
the light sensor, it must be dark outside in order for the
courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy lamps turn off
approximately 25 seconds after the last door is closed.
They will dim to off if the ignition key is turned to ON/
RUN, or immediately deactivate if the power locks are
activated.

The reading lamps are located on the overhead console
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened
and it is dark outside.
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.
Press it again to turn them off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

4-31

Footwell Lamps
For vehicles with footwell lamps, they are located under
the instrument panel and at the rear of the front seats.
These lamps provide soft light to the front and rear floor
areas. They dim with the instrument panel cluster lights.
Footwell lighting brightness can be adjusted with the
instrument panel brightness control located below the
exterior lamps control. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 4‑30. The footwell lights will turn off before
the instrument panel lights are at their lowest level of
brightness.

Battery Load Management
This feature monitors the vehicle's electrical load and
determines when the battery is in a heavy discharge
condition. During times of high electrical loading, the
engine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm)
setting than normal to make sure the battery charges.
High electrical loads may occur when several of the
following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,
rear window defogger, the climate control fan at high
speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans.

4-32

If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to
clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm
as they usually do and the climate control fan may
cut back to a lower speed. For more battery saving
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66.

Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest
levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable
to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑66.

Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle's battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will be
restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door or trunk
is opened, or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on.

Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being
drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map
lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally
left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they
automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is
off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of
the following occurs:
.

The ignition is turned on.

The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on
again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are
manually turned on with the ignition on or off.

4-33

Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
If the vehicle has a center console, the power outlet is
located inside the lower storage area. Some vehicles
may have an outlet on the right front lower part of the
driver's seat and under the climate control system
next to the ashtray. See Center Console Storage on
page 3‑56.
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat
area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.
There may be a small cap that must be removed to
access the accessory power outlet. When not using the
outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to
the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

4-34

Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtray(s)

Analog Clock

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.

The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust the
clock:

Front Ashtray
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below
the climate control system. To open, push down and
then release the cover. To clean the ashtray, push the
lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the opposite side of
the ashtray's lip to install.
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge
located at the top of the ashtray.

1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the
clock face.
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance
the clock hands. Holding the button down will
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the
button before reaching the desired time.
3. Push and release the button to increase the time
by one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.

Rear Ashtray
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To use
an ashtray, lift the lid.

4-35

Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.

Dual Climate Control System for Vehicles with Rear
Climate Control

Dual Climate Control System

A. Fan Control

F. Outside Air or AUX

B. Display

G. Recirculation

C. Air Delivery Mode
Control

H. PASS (Passenger
Climate Control)

D. Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
E. Air Conditioning

4-36

I. Rear Window Defogger

Automatic Operation
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is
selected on the fan control, the system adjusts the fan
speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when this
position is selected, the climate control fan speed will
lower.
AUTO (Automatic Mode):
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 21°C (68°F) and 26°C (78°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. In cold weather, the system will start
at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air
into the vehicle until warmer air is available.
The system starts out blowing air at the floor but
may change modes automatically as the vehicle
warms up to maintain the chosen temperature
setting. The length of time needed to warm the
interior depends on the outside temperature and
temperature of the vehicle.
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize
in order for the system to regulate automatically.
Then adjust the temperature as necessary to find
your comfort setting.

Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.
After the vehicle is started, the display shows the
interior temperature settings and the outside
temperature.
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode
control, the system automatically controls the air
conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures in
order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light is lit
when the system is operating automatically, even at
near freezing outside temperatures. Press # on the
fan control to turn off the A/C. For improved window
clearing performance in defog or defrost modes, the
A/C compressor runs automatically.

h (AUTO RECIRCULATION):

If the AUTO position is
selected on either the fan or mode control, the system
automatically controls the air inlet to supply fresh
outside air or recirculate the interior air to cool the car
faster. The light on the recirculation button will come on
when the system changes to recirculation. Outside air
can be forced by pressing h when the light is lit.
For vehicles without rear climate controls, press : to
force outside air. The next time AUTO fan or mode is
selected, the air inlet will reset back to AUTO operation.
4-37

Manual Operation

Select one of the following:

9 (Off):

AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode
operation.

Turns the entire climate control system off.
Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to
the floor. The airflow direction and temperature can be
adjusted, as indicated below.
If the temperature is adjusted while the system is off,
the display will light to show the current settings.

w x (Driver's Temperature Controls):

Press the
up or down buttons next to the fan control to manually
increase or decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.

w x (Passenger's Temperature Controls):

Press the
up or down buttons next to the air delivery mode control
to manually increase or decrease the temperature for
the front passenger. If the passenger climate control
system is off, pressing one of these buttons turns it on.

9 (Fan Control):

Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turning this
control completely counterclockwise will turn on the
automatic fan operation. If the airflow seems low when
the fan speed is at the highest setting, the passenger
compartment air filter may need to be replaced. See
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 4‑43.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.

4-38

F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with
some air directed to the side window outlets and the
windshield.
If recirculation is selected, it only stays on for
three minutes to reduce windshield fogging.

W (Floor/Defog):

This mode clears the windows
of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the floor outlets,
with some air going to the side window outlets and
windshield. When selected, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
floor/defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
and side window outlets. When selected, the system
automatically turns off recirculation and runs the
air conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the
AUX button on the front climate control system so that
the light is not lit.

# (Air Conditioning):

Press to turn the air
conditioning system on or off and override the automatic
system. When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor
comes on automatically, as necessary. To avoid window
fogging on rainy and humid days at temperatures above
freezing, run the air conditioning.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water may drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.

: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on or off. An indicator light comes on to show it is on.
Air is pulled from outside the vehicle. Pressing ? will
cancel this mode.

? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light below the button
comes on to show that this mode is on. This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle. This mode cannot be selected
while in the defog or defrost modes. If you try to select
the recirculation mode, the indicator light flashes three
times and turns off.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced,
select the defrost mode.
AUX: For vehicles with a rear climate control system,
press to turn the rear climate control fan on for
automatic operation. After the AUX button is pressed,
the indicator light comes on. Press the button again to
turn the auxiliary fan off. See Rear Climate Control
System on page 4‑42.
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to turn the
passenger climate control systems on or off. When the
passenger climate control system is on, the passenger
temperature setting is displayed. The temperature
selected by the front passenger also controls the rear
system air temperature unless the rear seat passengers
select their own comfort setting.

4-39

If the PASS button is pressed to turn the passenger
temperature setting off, the driver's temperature knob
will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.

Sensors

Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.

< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. The rear window defogger
will turn off approximately 20 minutes after the button
is pressed if the vehicle is moving at slower vehicle
speeds. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger
may stay on continuously. Each additional press will
run the defogger for approximately 10 minutes.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will turn on to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger is on.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

4-40

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle
of the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.

There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located next to the
steering wheel that
measures the temperature
of the air inside the
vehicle.

The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting
by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.

Outlet Adjustment
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located below
each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use
the thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the
airflow or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
In order to prevent false temperature readings at
startup, the displayed temperature will not change
until the following occurs:
.

Vehicle speed is above 16 km/h (10 mph) for
5 minutes.

Vehicle speed is above 51 km/h (32 mph) for
2 and a half minutes.

For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up or
down to change the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips
.

Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.

Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.

Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.

4-41

Rear Climate Control System
For vehicles with a rear climate control system, the rear
seat passengers can adjust the direction of the airflow,
fan speed and temperature for the rear seating area.
This system also works with the main climate control
system in the vehicle.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press the AUX button located
on the front climate control panel to turn the rear
climate control system on or off. When turned on the
rear system operates in automatic mode and the
temperature settings selected for the front climate
control panel will also be selected for the rear
passengers.
To adjust the rear climate control system, the rear
passenger can select a different temperature, mode
or fan speed. Whenever the rear passengers have
adjusted settings on the rear climate control system,
the AUX light is lit on the front climate control system.
When the front climate control system is turned off or in
defrost mode, the rear climate control system is turned
off. The rear system will turn back on once another front
mode is selected.
For more information on how to use the front climate
control system, see Dual Climate Control System on
page 4‑36. For more information on the air outlets,
see Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑41.

Automatic Operation
The rear climate control system is located on the back
of the center console.
A. Display

C. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

D. Air Delivery Mode Control

4-42

« A ª (Fan Control): Press until AUTO appears
on the display to place the system in automatic
mode. When automatic operation is active,
the system automatically controls the fan speed.

If in auto fan mode, pressing the up arrow button will
cancel automatic operation and places the system in
manual mode. If in auto mode, pressing the down arrow
will turn the rear climate control system off.

« N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press until
AUTO appears on the display to place the system in
automatic mode. When automatic operation is active,
the system controls the air delivery mode.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the
pollen from the air entering the vehicle. The filter may
need to be changed periodically. For how often to
change the passenger compartment air filter, see
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.

Manual Operation

« A ª (Fan Control): Press to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
« b ª (Temperature Control):

Press to increase or
decrease the temperature for the rear seat passengers.
Once the rear temperature setting is changed from
following the front temperature setting, it will no longer
follow changes to the front temperature setting until the
front climate control AUX button resets it.

« N ª (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these
buttons to change the air delivery mode. If in AUTO air
delivery mode, pressing the up arrow button will cancel
automatic operation and place the system in
manual mode.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the upper outlets.
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the upper outlets

The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield, on
the passenger's side of the vehicle.

and the floor outlets.

[ (Floor):

Air is directed to the floor outlets.
4-43

To access the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Use a tool to remove the cover. If the vehicle has
tabs that allow the cover to be unlatched with your
fingers, a tool will not be needed for this step.

4-44

2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on
the inboard side of the air filter compartment to
carefully pry the pin out.

Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.

3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the
air filter and the compartment wall on the outboard
side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin
holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the air
filter and any loose debris that may be inside the
air filter compartment.

Gauges can indicate when there might be or there
is a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear a
click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the
cover into place.

4-45

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar

4-46

Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑61 for more information.

Tachometer
This gauge indicates
the engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).

The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. The vehicle's odometer works together
with the driver information center. Trip A and Trip B
can be set on the odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑61 for more
information.
If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one is set to the correct mileage total of the old
odometer.

4-47

Safety Belt Reminders

Airbag Readiness Light

Safety Belt Reminder Light

The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 2‑58.

When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.

4-48

The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have
it fixed immediately.

{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66 for more information.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑68 for
important safety information. The overhead console
has a passenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol, to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags.

4-49

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal and seat‐mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.

4-50

Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.

Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
will stay on if the parking brake does not release fully.
If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it
means there is a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully.The pedal may be harder to push, or the
pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑24.

{ WARNING:
United States

Canada

This light comes on briefly when the engine is turned
on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn if there is a problem.

The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.

4-51

Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light

Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light

For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.

This warning light comes
on briefly while starting
the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light will
then go off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑51.

If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be
a problem with the traction control system and the
vehicle needs service. When this warning light is on,
the system will not limit wheel spin.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for all
brake related DIC messages.
4-52

If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑6 for more information.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly
while starting the engine.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light
For vehicles with the
lane departure warning
system, this light briefly
comes on green while
starting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak ® system and the
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
This light also comes on green if the system detects a
left or right lane marking. It flashes, changes to amber,
and three beeps sound, if a detected lane marking
is crossed without using a turn signal. For more
information, see the Index in the Navigation Manual.

See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5 for more
information.

4-53

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
comes on when the
engine is very hot.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This gauge shows
the engine coolant
temperature.

This light also comes on briefly when the vehicle is
started.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on
could cause the vehicle to overheat, see Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6‑32. See
Engine Overheating on page 6‑29 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑66 for more information.

4-54

It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if the
cooling system is operating properly. If the gauge
pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolant
is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning
light comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29
for more information.

Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.

When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑61 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it
is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59
for more information.

When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑63 for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.

4-55

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑3.

4-56

This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.

Reduce vehicle speed.

Avoid hard accelerations.

Avoid steep uphill grades.

If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.

Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.

Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑5.

If none of the above have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.

4-57

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs

Oil Pressure Light

Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.

The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.

The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system. The
vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack
of OBD II system readiness, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

4-58

{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.

Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.

Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑19.

See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑25 for more information.

Cruise Control Light
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑30 for more information.

This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑11 and Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 4‑14 for more information.

4-59

Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.

An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears in the Driver Information Center
and a single chime sounds. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑66 for more information.
Here are a few situations that may occur with the fuel
gauge. All of these situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gauge:

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑6
for more information.

At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.

The gauge may change when the vehicle is
turning, stops quickly or accelerates quickly.

It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the
tank's capacity to fill the tank.

Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It works
only when the engine
is on.

4-60

Driver Information Center (DIC)

DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, to
the left of the steering
wheel.

The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle's systems. The DIC
is also used to display warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located at
the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status messages.
The bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer
on the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display also
shows a digital speedometer on the right side.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.

3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
U Customization:

Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 4‑79 for more information on
the customization features.

4-61

V Set/Reset :

Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.

y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can
be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:

TRIP A or TRIP B
These displays show the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip odometer in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). Both odometers can be
used at the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing and holding the set/reset
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.

FUEL RANGE
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining kilometers (km) or miles (mi) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based
on the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway, the
number may change even though you still have the
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces
better fuel economy than city driving.
Once the range drops below an estimated
64 km (40 miles) remaining, the display will show
FUEL RANGE LOW.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for
more information.

AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)
This display shows the approximate average liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).
This number is calculated based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.
4-62

INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)

AVERAGE SPEED

This display shows the current fuel economy in either
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the fuel
economy that the vehicle has right now and will
change frequently as driving conditions change.
Unlike average economy, this display cannot be reset.

This display shows the average speed of the vehicle
in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.

FUEL USED

BATTERY VOLTAGE

This display shows the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the last reset of this
display. To reset this display, press the set/reset
button. The display will return to zero.

This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read BATTERY
VOLTAGE 13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display
will show LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will
show HIGH. Your vehicle's charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on
the DIC. This is normal. See Charging System Light on
page 4‑50 for more information.

TIMER ON/OFF
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and
display the end timing value.
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button
after the timer has been stopped. The display will return
to zero.

If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑66 and Electric Power
Management on page 4‑32 for more information.

Blank Display
This display shows no information.

4-63

Vehicle Information Display Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): The following display menu
items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:

OIL LIFE REMAINING
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on
the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life
remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You should
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3 and Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other
than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, See Engine Oil Life System on
page 6‑18. The display will show 100% when the
system is reset.

4-64

UNITS
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or
METRIC units.

PARKING ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows
the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF.
If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you
choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The UFRPA
system automatically turns back on after each vehicle
start. When the UFRPA system is turned off and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC will display
the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminder
that the system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑66 and Ultrasonic Front and
Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3‑40 for more
information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this display allows the system to be turned on
or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button
to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the
system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system
will be turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off,
the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the system
has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑66 and Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 3‑43 for more information.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add
air to a specific tire will appear in the display. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66 for more
information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.

SPEED LIMIT: XXX MPH
(SPEED LIMIT: XXX Km/h) or ADVISORY:
XXX MPH (ADVISORY: XXX Km/h)
This display will show the speed limit or the advised
speed as determined by the information on the map
disc in the navigation system. If there is no map disc in
the navigation system, this display will not be available.
The speed limit and speed advisory displays on the DIC
are for reference only. There may be segments of road
where speed data has not been captured or times
where incorrect speed data, or no speed data, will be
displayed by the DIC due to the navigation system not
correctly matching the vehicle’s position to the actual
road. Be aware of this and obey posted speed limits
wherever you drive.

SPEED ALERT
This display will allow you to customize the speed alert
warning. You can choose to have no warning display,
or to have it display at the limit, at 5 km/h (mph) over
the limit, or at 10 km/h (mph) over the limit. The DIC
will toggle between OFF, AT LIMIT, +5 , +10 (Km/h or
MPH). Press the reset button to make your selection.

4-65

RELEARN REMOTE KEY

Blank Display

This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will
erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.

This display shows no information.

To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.

4-66

DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle's systems.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press the
set/reset button.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.

ADVISORY XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the Speed Alert has been
turned on through the DIC Information Menu and the
vehicle is at or above the advised speed. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑61.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑25 for
more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑25 for
more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save
the charge in the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel
button until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for
your vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or ADD AIR
TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to
be checked. The low tire pressure warning light will also
come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑55. If a
tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and
set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
label. See Tires on page 6‑50, Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59.
You can receive more than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read the other messages that may have
been sent at the same time, press the set/reset button.
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑61.

4-67

CLEAN RADAR
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled because the radar is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may
also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray.
To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System” under
Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4‑14.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays whenever the cruise control is
set. See Cruise Control on page 4‑11 and Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4‑14 for more information.

This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.

If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
after a few seconds, this message clears and the
message “SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the
DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.

ENGINE HOT – A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 4‑54. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the
air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.

4-68

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 6‑29 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 4‑54.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 6‑32 for information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑29 for
more information.

This message displays when the engine has
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to pull
your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to
avoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating
on page 6‑29 and Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑32. A chime also sounds
when this message is displayed.

ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message displays when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions that might cause
this message. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as possible.

4-69

FOLLOWING GAP

FUEL LEVEL LOW
This symbol appears with
this message.

This symbol appears with this message.
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
this message displays to show the follow distance that
has been set. There are six follow distances to choose
from. Each follow distance is shown on the DIC by
displaying from one to six bars between two car
symbols. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4‑14
for more information.

This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single chime
sounds when this message is displayed. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑8.

HOOD OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely. See Hood Release on page 6‑13.
4-70

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display if the LDW system
does not activate due to a temporary condition.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 3‑46
for more information.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDAL
APPLIED
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing the
accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic
braking. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4‑14
for more information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil
pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the
vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected. See Engine Oil on page 6‑15 for more
information.
This message displays when the vehicle's engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light on
page 4‑58.

This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.

4-71

A multiple chime sounds when this message is
displayed. See Engine Oil on page 6‑15 for more
information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as possible
when this message is displayed.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

PARKING ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park), this message displays to remind
the driver that the UFRPA system has been turned off.
Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the UFRPA
system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑61. See Ultrasonic
Front and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3‑40
for more information.

4-72

This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.

RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. If this message appears when you attempt to
activate the system, continue driving for several minutes
and then try activating the system again. See Adaptive
Cruise Control on page 4‑14 for more information.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your
vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑61 for more information.

This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4‑48 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY

This message displays when the air delivery mode door
or the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning
and heating systems are no longer working. Have the
climate control system serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.

This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. The charging
system light also displays on the instrument panel
cluster. See Charging System Light on page 4‑50 for
more information. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer.

This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
4-73

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and
the antilock brake system warning light may also be
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 4‑51 and Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4‑52 for
more information. If this happens, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the brake system needs service. See your
dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes on page 6‑35
for more information.

If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message displays
if there is a problem with the UFRPA system. Do not
use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Front
and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) on page 3‑40 for
more information. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system, this message may display to indicate that the
LDW system is not working properly. If this message
remains on after continued driving, the system needs
service. See your dealer. See Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) on page 3‑46 for more information.

4-74

SERVICE POWER STEERING
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
system. See Steering on page 5‑8.
This message displays if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.
See your dealer.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and this message displays, both SBZA displays
will remain on indicating there is a problem with the
SBZA system. If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs service. See your
dealer. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑43
for more information.

SERVICE STABILITRAK
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑5.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak system.
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then
back on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your dealer
as soon as possible.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
This message displays when the magnetic ride control
or automatic leveling control system is not operating
properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the
engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation on page 3‑21 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS
is not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑55. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑63 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS, see your
dealer.

4-75

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). When this message is
displayed, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See your dealer for service.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑6 for
more information.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
vehicle's transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.

SET SPD (Speed)
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this
message displays whenever the cruise control is set.
First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message
appears. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE SET TO
XXX MPH (km/h)” message clears and the message
“SET SPD XX” displays at the bottom of the DIC.
See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” earlier in this
section and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 4‑14 for
more information.
4-76

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
has been turned off. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 3‑43 and DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑61 for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system, this message displays when the SBZA system
is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your blind zone. The sensor may be
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush. This message
may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray.
It may also come on when driving in isolated areas
with no guardrails, trees, or road signs and light traffic.
Your vehicle does not need service. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6‑100.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑43 for
more information.

SPEED LIMIT XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the Speed Alert has
been turned on through the DIC Information Menu and
the vehicle is at or above the speed limit. See DIC
Operation and Displays on page 4‑61 for more
information.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 128 km/h (80 mph) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays when your vehicle's throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears with
this message.

STABILITRAK NOT READY
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message may
display and the Traction Control System and StabiliTrak
Warning Light on the instrument panel cluster may be
on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 km/h
(19 mph) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is not
functional until the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 5‑5 for more information.

This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑19 for more information.

4-77

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it is
on and tightened properly.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑67,
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑62, and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 for more
information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑6 for more information.

This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed.

TRUNK OPEN
This symbol appears with
this message.

TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5‑6 for more information.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
4-78

TURN SIGNAL ON

DIC Vehicle Customization

This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime
sounds when this message is displayed.

Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be programmed to one
setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different drivers.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This symbol appears with
this message.

All of the customization options may not be available
on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.

This message displays when your vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 6‑33 for more information.

4-79

To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
4-80

DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select when the vehicle's
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more
information.

This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors
automatically lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h) for
three seconds.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-81

REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4
for more information.

OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
4-82

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

DELAY DOOR LOCK

EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle's doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and
a door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition
for this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.

This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:

Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's
doors.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.

ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-83

APPROACH LIGHTING

CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.

This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.

Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

4-84

Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

PARK TILT MIRRORS

EASY EXIT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically
tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 3‑39 for more
information.

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on
page 2‑6 for more information.

Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger's outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and passenger's outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the
easy exit seat button.
BUTTON AND KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver's seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up and forward when
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat and steering column will stay in the original exit
position, unless a memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
4-85

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

SEAT/TELESCOPE: The driver's seat and the steering
column telescope feature will recall.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

TILT/TELESCOPE: The steering wheel tilt and steering
column telescope features will recall.

EASY EXIT SETUP

ALL (default): The driver's seat and the steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,
if your vehicle has this option.

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy
exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 2‑6 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier
for more information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel
on page 2‑6 for more information.

TELESCOPE ONLY: The steering column telescope
feature will recall.

Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:

SEAT/TILT: The driver's seat and the steering wheel tilt
feature will recall.

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will
occur.

SEAT ONLY: The driver's seat will recall.
TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tilt feature will recall.

4-86

ON: The driver's seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed. The steering column will also
move on vehicles with the power tilt and telescopic
steering feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column on page 4‑4 for more information.
See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 4‑61 for more information on
matching transmitters to driver ID numbers.

Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.

FACTORY SETTINGS

REMOTE START

This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.

If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn
the remote start off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7
for more information.

Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.

RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-87

Exiting the Feature Settings Menu

Audio System(s)

The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:

Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.

The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.

The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.

The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.

A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.

{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.

Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.

Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2.

4-88

Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any
equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 3‑24 for more information.

Setting the Clock
Radio with a Single CD or a
Six-Disc CD Player
The vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If you
decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable
the radio clock display.

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio
Clock
For the Single CD Player
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting
menus appear.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and date
settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
currently displayed status of either ON or OFF.
The ON display indicates the radio clock display is
disabled and the OFF display indicates the radio
clock display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to
toggle the radio clock display on or off.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.
The menus for clock and date settings are
removed, and ON displays as a current status
indicating that the clock display can be turned
on, if desired.
4-89

The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.
Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio
clock using the procedure below to synchronize both
clocks.

For a Six-Disc CD Player
To turn the radio clock display on or off:
1. Turn the radio on.

H is displayed
Press the pushbutton located under H until the

2. Press the MENU button until
3.

clock and date settings appear.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the menu for default clock and date
settings appear.

4-90

5. Press the pushbutton located under the
currently displayed status of either ON or OFF.
The ON display indicates the radio clock display is
disabled and the OFF display indicates the radio
clock display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to
toggle the radio clock display on or off.
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen
displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then
returns to the original clock display menu.
If the radio clock display is turned off, the
screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds.
The menus for clock and date settings are
removed, and ON displays as a current status
indicating that the clock display can be turned
on, if desired.

Setting the Time and Date

For a Six-Disc CD Player

For the Single CD Player

This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the
time and date. To set the time and date:

This type of radio has a H button for setting the time
and date. To set the time and date:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date
if selected, increases by one.
.

Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD
button.

To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can
also turn the a knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the
selected setting.

1. Turn the radio on.

H option is displayed.
Press the pushbutton located under H and the

2. Press the MENU button until
3.

HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
day, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date
if selected, increases by one.
.

Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD
button.

To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can
also turn the a knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the
selected setting.

4-91

Changing the Time and Date Default
Setting
For the Single CD Player
To change the time and date default setting:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/
year to day/month/year, by pressing the H button.
2. Once the clock and date settings display along
with the forward arrow tab, press the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow tab until the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the H button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.

4-92

For the Six-Disc CD Player
To change the time and date default setting:
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour
to 24 hour or the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing
the MENU button.
2. Once H displays, press the pushbutton located
under H until the time and date settings display
along with a forward arrow.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward
arrow tab until the time 12H and 24H, and the
date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option, then press the MENU button again to apply
the selected default, or let the screen time out.

Radio(s) (MP3)

Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with SCV
automatically adjusts the radio volume to compensate
for road and wind noise while driving. That way, the
volume level should sound about the same while
driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has RDS. The RDS feature is
available for use only on FM stations that broadcast
RDS information. This system relies upon receiving
specific information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio is
tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.

4-93

AudioPilot®: If the vehicle has the Bose® audio
system, it has AudioPilot noise compensation
technology.
To use AudioPilot:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the
AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio display.
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature on
or off.
When turned ON, AudioPilot continuously adjusts
the audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise, so that the music always sounds
the same at the set volume level.
The feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through the vehicle's
audio system. At high volume settings there might
be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For more
information on AudioPilot, visit bose.com/audiopilot.

Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™.
The selection displays.

a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press this button to
display additional text information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station, or MP3/WMA song. A choice of
additional information such as: Channel, Song, Artist,
CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of
the tabs and the information about that tab displays.
When information is not available, No Info displays.

4-94

Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See
Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the radio favorites page button. Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any combination of AM,
FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6
label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming your favorites for
the chosen amount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the a knob to
adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station's frequency is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.

4-95

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
®

EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose amplified radio,
perform the following steps to setup the equalization
settings:
1. Press the
displays.

a knob until the equalization label

2. Press the pushbutton located under the
equalization label to get choices of POP, ROCK,
CTRY (country), TALK, JAZZ, and CLAS
(classical), to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.

4-96

For the Bose amplified radio, perform the following
steps to setup the equalization settings:
1. Press the

a knob until the DSP label displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label
to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and Surround,
to display.
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
setting.
To select Surround, press either the fourth or fifth
pushbutton located under the displayed Surround
until Centerpoint displays.
To return to the manual mode, press the tune knob.
Select either BASS, MID, or TREB and start to manually
adjust the settings by turning the a knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the a knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired
label. Turn the a knob to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV buttons until
the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the a knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.

Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
This feature is used to provide a choice of four different
listening experiences. DSP can be used while listening
to the audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode,
press the a knob until the DSP control label displays.

Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label until
the control labels display. Continue by pressing the
desired button below the control labels on the display.
For more information on the control label displays, see
the following:
.

Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for normal mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating positions.

Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust
the audio for the driver to receive the best possible
sound quality.

Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.

Surround (Centerpoint®): Select this screen
button to enable Bose® Centerpoint signal
processing circuitry. Centerpoint produces a
full vehicle surround sound listening experience
from a CD, MP3/WMA, or XM stereo digital audio
source and delivers five independent audio
channels from conventional two channel stereo
recordings. (Not available for AM, FM, or auxiliary
sources.)

DSP is only available on vehicles that have the Bose
Premium audio system.

4-97

Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM
stations while the radio is in the XM mode. To find
XM channels within a desired category, perform the
following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays. Another
way to select a category is to press the s REV
or \ FWD button until the desired category is
selected.
2. Press either of the two pushbuttons below the
desired category tab to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that category.
3. Turn the a knob, press the pushbuttons below the
displayed right or left arrows, or press either SEEK
arrow to go to the previous or the next XM station
within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.

4-98

Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the a knob to display the category to be
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The CAT button also toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.

Radio Message

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)

Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑108 later in this
section for further detail.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play the track number
displays.

Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and
the way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other
protective cases and away from direct sunlight and
dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of
a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
of the hole and the outer edge.

4-99

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
The CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:

Care of The CD Player

1. Press and release the load button.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.

Z (Eject):

Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
for two seconds to eject all discs, if one or more discs
are loaded.

a (Tune):
playing.

4-100

Turn to select tracks on the CD currently

Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the CD.

RDM (Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player):
With the random setting, CD tracks can be played in
random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or all
CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use random:
.

Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
tab until Randomize Current Disc displays to play
the tracks in random order from the CD that is
currently playing. Press again to turn off
random play.

Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
tab until Randomize All Discs displays to play
tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order. Press again to turn off
random play.

s REV (Fast Reverse):

Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks
can be played in random, rather than sequential order.
This feature is not available in playlist mode. To use
random, do the following:
1. To play tracks in random order from the CD that is
currently playing, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label. The random icon displays.

4 (Information):

Press to switch the display between
the track number, elapsed time of the track, and the
time. When the ignition is off, press to display the
time (if the clock display is enabled). See “Enabling/
Disabling the Digital Radio Clock” under, Setting the
Clock on page 4‑89 for more information.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play. The random icon is no longer
highlighted.

4-101

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device
Found” displays.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see
Using an MP3 on page 4‑103 later in this section.

CD Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
.

The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the data
file format.

It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.

You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.

The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

4-102

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. You can however, connect an
external audio device such as an iPod™, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape
player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When connecting an auxiliary device, the radio
automatically detects the device and “Aux Input Device”
displays. The device begins playing audio over the
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already
been connected, the device does not begin playing
audio until the radio's CD/AUX button is pressed.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to do
additional volume adjustments from the portable device.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
a portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album can display when files are recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing
the CAT button toggles between compressed and
uncompressed audio format.

4-103

MP3/WMA Format

Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on
the display, potentially getting cut off.

Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc
not to function in the player.

If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
.

Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.

The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.

Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder or
album should contain 18 songs or less.

Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.

Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).

4-104

Playlists can be changed by using the S c and
c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows.
An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded
using no file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or
CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum cannot be accessed.

Root Directory

Order of Play

The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to
any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.

Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
.

Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.

No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions do not display on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.

Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
‐ Playlists can be changed by pressing the S c
and c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the
SEEK arrows.

Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.

When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
4-105

File System and Naming

Playing an MP3/WMA

The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.

Z (Eject):

Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using
the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files. Playlists must
have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T
folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows. Tracks
cannot be changed. Songs are played sequentially;
press the s REV or \ FWD to reverse or advance
through the currently playing song.

4-106

Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is
currently playing, press and release this button.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If it is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.

a (Tune):

Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R currently playing.

Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow
is held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files
on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder):

Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in
the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder):

Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the next
folder.

s REV (Fast Reverse):

Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):

Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in a
six-disc CD player. To use random:
1. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays to play
MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.

2. Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays to play
songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player
in random order. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It may take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin
playing while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins
playing again.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the
display between the arrows. Once all songs by that
artist have played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to
listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The CD
goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist
displays.
4-107

To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the Back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
have played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below
the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device Found”
displays.

4-108

XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer.
Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within
a short period of time, the receiver or antenna could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.

4-109

Navigation/Radio System

Audio System

For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change
the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains
in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.

Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
4-110

Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑120 for more
information.

b g (Push To Talk) : Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.

Pairing

Pairing a Phone

A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected
to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell
phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is
not connected, calls will be made using OnStar ®
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

Pairing Information:

4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.

Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.

The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.

Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.

Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.

Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
6. The system responds with “ has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.

4-111

Listing All Paired and Connected Phones

Linking to a Different Phone

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.

3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.

Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete ? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting ”.

4-112

If another phone is found, the response will be
“ is now connected”.

If another phone is not found, the original
phone remains connected.

Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
.

Store

Digit Store

Directory

Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
.

If the system recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats
the phone number.

If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re‐entered.

5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds
with “About to store . Does that
sound OK?”.
.

If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.

If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.

4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.

4-113

3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
.

If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.

To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.

4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds
with “About to store . Does that
sound OK?”.
.

If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.

If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.

Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.

Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.

Delete

Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.

4-114

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
? Please say yes or no”.
.

If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with
“OK, deleting , returning to the
main menu.”
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”.
The system responds with “No. OK, let's try
again, please say the name tag.”

Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
.

Dial

Digit Dial

Call

Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command

Using the Delete All Name Tags Command

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.

The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).

2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.

To use the delete all name tags command:

3. Say the entire number without pausing.

1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
.

Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.

Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.

If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number.

If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re‐entered.

4-115

Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using , please say the
first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
.

If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.

Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
4-116

3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
.

If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, ” and
dials the number.

If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, ” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re‐entered.

Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.

Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using ” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.

Receiving a Call

Three‐Way Calling

When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.

.
.

b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Press

Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
.

Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.

b g again to return to the original call.

Press

To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.

Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.

1. While on a call press b g. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press
the callers together.

b g to link all

Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.

4-117

To Mute a call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.

Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-Thru
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing ”.
.

4-118

The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.

Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
.

If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending ” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.

If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial ,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.

Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
.

If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.

If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.

4-119

Clearing the System

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.

Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending
on the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
steering wheel.

Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for FCC
information.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

w (Next):

Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.

c x (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a
CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar ® systems press
and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with
those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑110 or the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.

4-120

SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than two seconds to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in
AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the
¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc
while sourced to a CD player.

Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.

AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.

4-121

Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference
with the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging
the phone's battery, or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an increased level of static
while listening to the radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and
turn it off.

Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.

4-122

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

Section 5

Driving Your Vehicle

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Magnetic Ride Control™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-24
5-24
5-24
5-26

5-1

Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑12.

{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
.

Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.

Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.

5-2

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.

Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5‑6.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.

Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑51.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking.

5-3

Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on,
and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.

5-4

If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4‑52.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each front
wheel and at both rear wheels.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor operating might be heard and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.

Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature
uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module
to supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the

vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist
feature will automatically disengage when the brake
pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may have the StabiliTrak system which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
This is accomplished by selectively applying any one
of the vehicle's brakes and reducing engine power.
The StabiliTrak system comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. The system cannot be
turned off.
This light will flash when
the system is operating.

5-5

The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light
on the instrument panel cluster comes on after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for
30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is off until the light
has turned off. This could take up to 15 minutes.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will flash when the system is operating.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 4‑52 and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on
page 4‑53 for more information. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message is displayed
and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on if there is a problem with
the system. When this light and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are on, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly.

Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning too much or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the

5-6

system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power (by closing the throttle and managing engine
spark) to limit wheel spin.
The TCS and StabiliTrak®
light will flash when the
system is limiting
wheel spin.

The system may be heard or felt while it is working,
but this is normal. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 4‑52 for more information.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑11.
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message in the
DIC and the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes on
if there is a problem with the traction control system.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL message are on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located in front of
the shift lever.

TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, always leave the system turned on.
TCS can be turned off if needed.
The system can be turned on or off at any time by
pressing the TCS button. The DIC will display
TRACTION CONTROL OFF when the button is
pressed, and part of the traction control system is
disabled. The vehicle will still have brake-traction
control, but will not be able to use the engine speed
management system. System noises may be heard as
a result of the brake-traction control working. If the
controller detects excessive wheel spin in this mode,
the TCS/StabiliTrak light may blink.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow on page 5‑17.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3 for more information.

Magnetic Ride Control™
The vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control
that automatically adjusts the ride of the vehicle.
The controller receives input from the system to
determine the proper ride. If the controller detects a
problem within the system, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS
message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66 for more information. If this message
appears, have the vehicle serviced at your dealer.

Electronically Controlled Air Ride
Suspension
Professional Vehicles may have Electronically
Controlled Air Suspension. The air ride controller
receives input from the system to determine the proper
ride. If the controller detects a problem with the system,
the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS
message. If this message appears, have the vehicle
serviced at your dealer.

5-7

Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort felt when
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when
parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.

5-8

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much speed as
possible from a collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.

Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.

5-9

Passing

Skidding

Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.

Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.

Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.

Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

5-10

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If the traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, the system may be
active. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑5.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions.

It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle
control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.

Driving at Night

Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.

Watch for animals.

When tired, pull off the road.

Do not wear sunglasses.

Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.

Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
.

Drive defensively.

Do not drink and drive.

Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.

5-11

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Hydroplaning

Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.

{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.

5-12

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.

Allow extra following distance.

Pass with caution.

Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6‑50.

Turn off cruise control.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Highway Hypnosis

To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer before departing.

Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.

Things to check on your own include:
.

Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?

Other driving tips include:
.

Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

Wiper Blades: In good shape?

Keep interior temperature cool.

Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.

Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?

Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.

Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?

5-13

Hill and Mountain Roads

{ WARNING:

Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
.

Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.

Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.

{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

5-14

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
the engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.

Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.

Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).

Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can
be treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.

The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑6
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than
when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

5-15

Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Service on page 8‑7. To get help
and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.

Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.

Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{ WARNING:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.

Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.

Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
(Continued)

5-16

WARNING: (Continued)
.

Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.

Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.

Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑34.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.

Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑17.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.

{ WARNING:
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑75.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑24.
5-17

Loading the Vehicle

Tire and Loading Information Label

It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory‐installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification
label.

{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.

5-18

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver's door open, you will
find the label attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading Information
label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑50 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑59.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle;
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and
Loading Information label specific to your vehicle
will be provided and installed by the final body
manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information
label, should be attached to the B‐pillar of your
vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer's
manual or contact them directly. The label shows
the original tires installed on your professional
vehicle and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for those tires. The label also tells you
the professional vehicle's capacity weight.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5-19

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

Item
A

B
C

5-20

Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
300 lbs
(136 kg)
700 lbs
(317 kg)

Example 2

Item
A

B
C

Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Example 3

Total

Item

1,000 lbs
(453 kg)

750 lbs
(340 kg)

250 lbs
(113 kg)

Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =

Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs
(0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle's capacity weight and seating

5-21

positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the
vehicle specific Certification label is provided by
the final stage manufacturer. The coach‐builder
should be consulted if the final stage
manufacturer's label is not present. The Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be on
the driver's door edge.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit” earlier in this section.

{ WARNING:

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver's door. This label
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
5-22

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.

Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle, like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.

{ WARNING:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.

Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In
a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.

When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level
as the load changes. It is automatic, you do not
need to adjust anything.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions. An air compressor connected
to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of
the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height.
The system is activated when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN and will automatically adjust
vehicle height thereafter. The system may exhaust
(lower vehicle height) for up to ten minutes after
the ignition key has been turned to LOCK/OFF.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.

5-23

Towing

Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Service on page 8‑7.

What's the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.

To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.

Does the vehicle have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.

Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑13.

Towing Your Vehicle

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.

5-24

Dinghy Towing

Dolly Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.

The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow the
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. Use a dolly if the vehicle must be
towed. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section for more
information.

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.

5-25

5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.

{ WARNING:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could
be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.

5-26

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your dealer
for important information about towing a trailer with
the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving the
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for the safety of the driver and
the passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.

There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1600 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, transmission or other parts could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the
transmission to a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.

Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle's parts.

Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature
is above 100°F (38°C).

If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
system and it doesn't seem to be working properly
while pulling a trailer, turn the system off. See Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 3‑43 for more
information.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:
.

The weight of the trailer

The weight of the trailer tongue

The total weight on the vehicle's tires

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.

5-27

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See
Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for more
information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load
must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.

5-28

Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

Safety Chains

It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here are
some rules to follow:

Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.

The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.

Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, then
be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 3‑34 for more information.

Trailer Brakes
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not tap into
the vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both
brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained
properly.

5-29

Driving with a Trailer

Passing

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.

More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.

5-30

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.

Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

Parking on Hills

The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.

{ WARNING:

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.

Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.

Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transmission temperatures may
result and damage the vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transmission
to cool.

If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle's speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑29.

5. Release the brake pedal.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).

5-31

Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
.

start the engine,

shift into a gear, and

release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more information. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid,
engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is
a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

5-32

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 6‑29.

Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer, be
sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
vehicle before changing the tire.

Section 6

Service and Appearance Care

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-32
6-32
6-33
6-35
6-38
6-40
6-44
6-47
6-47
6-48
6-50
6-51
6-56
6-59
6-61
6-62
6-63
6-67
6-69
6-70
6-71
6-72
6-73
6-74
6-1

Section 6

Service and Appearance Care

Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage . . . . . . 6-84
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Wood Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Speaker Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100

6-2

Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Underseat Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-101
6-101
6-102
6-102
6-103
6-103
6-103
6-103
6-104
6-104
6-104
6-105
6-105
6-105
6-105
6-106
6-106
6-106
6-109
6-114

Service

Accessories and Modifications

For service and parts needs, visit your dealer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.

When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories could even
cause malfunction or damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑74.

6-3

California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.

California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.

Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.

Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑17.

6-4

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑13.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.

Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.

Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use
regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher,
but the vehicle's acceleration could be slightly reduced,
and a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock, might be heard. If the octane is
less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise
when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
6-5

Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If heavy
knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑6 for additional
information.

California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.

6-6

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑55. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.

Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every
engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.

Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.

6-7

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

6-8

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.

{ WARNING:

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too
soon, it will spring back to the right.

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑100.

6-9

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑55.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑66 for more information.

6-10

{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4‑55.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
.

Dispense fuel only into approved containers.

Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)
.

Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.

Do not smoke while pumping fuel.

Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.

6-11

Checking Things Under
the Hood

{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

6-12

{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To lift the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever, located near the
center of the hood. Move the release lever up and
to the right to raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

6-13

Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:

4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar

6-14

A. Underhood Fuse Block on page 6‑106.

Engine Oil

B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑40.

Checking Engine Oil

C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑33.

It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Engine Coolant on page 6‑26.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 6‑40.
F. Power Steering Fluid on page 6‑32.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑35.
J. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap and Dipstick
(Out of View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 6‑21.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.

6-15

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.

6-16

See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the
dipstick all the way back in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.

GM4718M
This vehicle's engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting
this standard may be identified as synthetic.
However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GM
standard. Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M.

Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
.

SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.

American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol

Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

This vehicle's engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for
this vehicle.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.

6-17

Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.

Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on. Change the oil as

6-18

soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
trained people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior
to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) being turned on, reset
the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the DIC INFO button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. See DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4‑61.
3. Press and hold the DIC INFO RESET button until
100% displays.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
6-19

To inspect or replace the filter:

To reinstall the cover:
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of
the cover.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and align
the two screws.
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover.

{ WARNING:

1. Remove the two screws on the top of the engine
air cleaner/filter cover.
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to
the two hinges located on the inboard side of the
cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter and any loose
debris that may be found in the air cleaner base.
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

6-20

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑9.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little
fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
.

When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).

How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid

At high speed for quite a while.

In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealer service
department.

While pulling a trailer.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is
82°C to 93°C (180°F to 200°F).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
24 km (15 miles) when outside temperatures are
above 10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F),
you may have to drive longer.

6-21

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the transmission fluid cap which is located
next to the radiator hose and below the engine
air cleaner/filter assembly on the driver side of
the vehicle. The cap is marked TRANS FLUID.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
2. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter
assembly to reach the transmission fluid cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
then pull it back out again.

6-22

How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑9.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter assembly.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑9.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the
handle clockwise.

6-23

Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.

4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar

6-24

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
(Continued)

WARNING: (Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.

6-25

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑29.

What to Use

{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

6-26

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
.

Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.

Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.

Protects against rust and corrosion.

Will not damage aluminum parts.

Helps keep the proper engine temperature.

Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑9 for more information.

Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑26 for more information.

How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank

{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

6-27

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.

{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.

6-28

2. Keep turning the cap and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant
surge tank with the
proper mixture to the
FULL COLD mark on
the side of the coolant
surge tank.

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL ®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.

4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark
on the side of the coolant surge tank.

There is an engine temperature warning light and/or
gauge on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 4‑54 and
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 4‑54.
The vehicle may also display a ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑66 for more information.
You will also hear a chime.

5. Replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand‐tight and
fully seated.

6-29

You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Service on page 8‑7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑32 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.

If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment

{ WARNING:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6‑32 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.

6-30

If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
.

Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

Stops after high-speed driving.

Idles for long periods in traffic.

Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:

If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see "Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode"
next in this section.

1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.

6-31

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
is displayed, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in
power and engine performance. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing
a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15.

6-32

Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located next to
the underhood fuse block
on the passenger side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for more
information on location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

What to Use

To check the power steering fluid:

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑9.
Always use the proper fluid.

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑9.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.

Windshield Washer Fluid

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.

What to Use
When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.

6-33

Adding Washer Fluid

Notice:

The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑66 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
reservoir location.

6-34

When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.

Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.

Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.

Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze)
in the windshield washer. It can damage
the vehicle's windshield washer system
and paint.

Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
reservoir location and
access.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.

The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.

A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑66.

6-35

What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑9.

Notice:
.

Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.

If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑100.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.

{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

6-36

Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new
pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be
required.

Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.

6-37

Replacing Brake System Parts

Battery

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.

Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed.

6-38

{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The battery is under the rear seat cushion. To access
the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Block on
page 6‑109. Access to the battery is not necessary to
jump start the vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 6‑40.

{ WARNING:
A battery that is not properly vented can let
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear
seat cushion. These fumes can damage the rear
seat safety belt systems. You might not be able to
see this damage and the safety belts might not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If a
replacement battery is ever needed, it must be
vented in the same manner as the original battery.
Always make sure that the vent hose is properly
reattached before reinstalling the seat cushion.

To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached
to the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery and
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the
floor pan (E).

6-39

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑40 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.

{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.

They contain acid that can burn you.

They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.

Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.

Jump Starting

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.

6-40

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal.

4.6L LD8 Engine shown,
4.6L L37 Engine similar
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger's side of
the vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the
terminal. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for more information on the location of
the remote positive (+) terminal.
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on
the rear underseat fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located behind
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.
It is marked GND (−).

6-41

You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger's
seat. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote terminals are for
that purpose.

{ WARNING:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

{ WARNING:
Using an open flame near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
(Continued)

6-42

WARNING: (Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

{ WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go
to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with the
good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end of the cable touch
anything until the next step. The other end of the
negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

6-43

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.

Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-44

However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described.
Notice: To make sure the headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑13
for more information.

The vehicle should:
.

Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.

Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.

Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.

Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.

Be fully assembled and all other work stopped
while headlamp aiming is being performed.

Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.

Have all tires properly inflated.

Have the spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.

2. Find the center line running through the lens of the
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the center
line running through the lens of the headlamp.

6-45

4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed
to be seen on the flat surface.

6-46

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws.
They are located under the hood near each
headlamp assembly. First lift the flap to access
either of them. Each one is the top outboard
screw by the “V” on the cover panel next to the
aiming flap.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex wrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.

Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your
dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting

{ WARNING:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try
to service any of the system components, you
could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or a
qualified technician service them.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the
correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B)
shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.

6-47

Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here is how to remove the
wiper blade:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away from
the windshield.

3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point
and pull the blade assembly down toward the
windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.

6-48

To remove and replace the wiper blade element:
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at one
end which are engaged by the bottom claw set of
the wiper blade. At the notched end of the wiper
blade, pull the wiper blade element from the wiper
blade assembly.
2. Replace the element by starting at the heel end of
the wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the
base of the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade
element, notched end last, into the wiper blade
claw sets.
3. Engage the last claw into the notched end of the
wiper blade element by squeezing the wiper blade
element at the notched area, and push the wiper
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are
engaged by the last claw set and all the other
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the
wiper blade element on both sides.

A. Correct Installation
B. Incorrect Installation
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑11.

6-49

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.

WARNING: (Continued)
.

Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑59.

Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.

{ WARNING:
.

Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.

Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. SeeLoading the Vehicle
on page 5‑18.
(Continued)

See High-Speed Operation on page 6‑61 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.

6-50

Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.

Passenger Car Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-51

(E) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑72.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.
Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See Spare Tire on page 6‑95 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 6‑76.

6-52

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑59 and Spare Tire on page 6‑95.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.

6-53

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation) :
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Light Truck Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.

6-54

(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.

(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑59.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.

Tire Size

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.

The following illustration shows an example of a
tire size.

(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in
inches.

(A) P‐Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first
character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by
the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.

(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.

6-55

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑59.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.

6-56

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

6-57

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑69.

6-58

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑72.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18.

Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that

under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle's center pillar. This label lists your
vehicle's original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.

Too much flexing

Too much heat

Tire overloading

Premature or irregular wear

Poor handling

For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18. How you load
your vehicle affects the vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.

Reduced fuel economy

When to Check

If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.

Unusual wear

Poor handling

Rough ride

Needless damage from road hazards

Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information see
Spare Tire on page 6‑95.

6-59

How to Check

Professional Vehicle

Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are under‐inflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).

The proper inflation of the tires on your
professional vehicle depends on the type of
tires on it.
.
If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the
cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).
.
If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires,
the cold inflation pressure depends on the
vehicle mass and should be determined by
the vehicle coach‐builder. A Tire and Loading
Information label provided by the final stage
manufacturer should be attached to the
B‐pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
If the final stage manufacturer's label is
not present, the coach‐builder should be
consulted. Do not use the tire pressures
indicated on the General Motors label.
These tire pressures are for the incomplete
vehicle and are not the correct tire pressures
for the completed professional vehicle.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get
a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.

6-60

Operation at inflation pressures below this
recommendation may cause your tires to become
overloaded.

High-Speed Operation

{ WARNING:
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph)
or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition, and set
to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.

If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire's sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) @ 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high‐speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires
to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18.

6-61

Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.

6-62

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑63 for
additional information.

Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.

Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.

If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be
viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 4‑61 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑66.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.

6-63

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑67 and Tires on page 6‑50.
Notice: Using non‐approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑77 for information regarding
the inflator kit materials and instructions.

6-64

TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
.

One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.

The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.

One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑70.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's
air pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions
the matching process stops and you need to start over.

6-65

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.

6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.

7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's lock and unlock buttons at the same
time for approximately five seconds. The horn
sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn
mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays on the DIC screen.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.

4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.

6-66

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑69 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑69 and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑74
for more information.

Four‐Tire Rotation Pattern

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
not be included in the tire rotation process.
Use the four‐tire rotation pattern shown.

6-67

Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) will need to have the sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑62.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114.

{ WARNING:
Five‐Tire Rotation Pattern

A five‐tire rotation pattern may be used for your
professional vehicle, if it has a full‐size spare tire
and wheel assembly that matches the original
equipment tires and wheels in size, type and
brand. The correct five‐tire rotation pattern is
shown.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18.

6-68

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑85.

When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.

You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.

The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.

6-69

Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the
TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑51 for
additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑67
for information on proper tire rotation.
6-70

{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires
of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire and
wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire and wheel, they have the same overall
diameter as your vehicle's full‐size tires and
wheels. Because they were designed and
developed for use on your vehicle, it is all right to
drive your vehicle with the compact spare installed
properly. Compact spare tires are designed for
temporary use only. See Spare Tire on
page 6‑95.

{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on
the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑62.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑18, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on
your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.

{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑70 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑3 for additional
information.

6-71

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.

6-72

While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to
Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Temperature – A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments
to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

6-73

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels
can sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer if any
of these conditions exist.
Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.

6-74

{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle
have five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑85 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it
is contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle's wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the front tires.

6-75

If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

6-76

{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
spare tire, follow the instructions below. To use the tire
sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 6‑77.

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit

{ WARNING:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.

{ WARNING:

The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
temporarily seal punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an
under inflated tire.

Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not exceed the
recommended pressure.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire
is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and
compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service
on page 8‑7.

6-77

Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
The kit includes:

Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.

A. On/Off Button
B. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

E. Air Only
Hose (Black)

C. Pressure Relief Button

F. Sealant/Air
Hose (Clear)

D. Pressure Gauge

G. Power Plug

6-78

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑76. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑84.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑34.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit
during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated
environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the
tire faster.

If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.

6-79

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) clockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gauge (D) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly
drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with
air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (D).
The recommended inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59.
The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
pressure reading. The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure is reached.

6-80

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the
inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside
Service on page 8‑7.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is
distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through
18 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (G) back in their original location.

16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister and place
it in a highly visible
location. The label is a
reminder not to exceed
55 mph (90 km/h) until
the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage
location in the vehicle.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
If the tire pressure has fallen more than
10 psi (68 kPa) below the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal
the tire. See Roadside Service on page 8‑7.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire,
and vehicle.
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant/
air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer or in
accordance with local state codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer within a 100 miles (161 km) of
driving to have the tire repaired or replaced.

6-81

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:

2. Unwrap the air only hose (E) and the power
plug (G).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (E) onto the tire valve
stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (G) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 4‑34.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do
not use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 6‑76.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
its storage location. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage on page 6‑84.

6-82

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running
while using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (B) counterclockwise to
the Air Only position.

9. Press the on/off (A) button to turn the
compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure gauge (D).
The recommended inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑59.

Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister:

The pressure gauge (D) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate
reading. The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
11. Press the on/off button (A) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (G) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (E) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.

1. Remove the plastic cover.
2. Unscrew the connector (B) from the canister (A).

14. Replace the air only hose (E) and the power
plug (G) and cord back in its original location.
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
6-83

3. Pull up on the canister (A) to remove it.
4. Replace with a new canister which is available
from your dealer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
6. Screw the connector (B) to the canister (A).
7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Lift the cover.
3. Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire
sealant and compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse
the steps.

6-84

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).

{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to change
your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.

A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.

6-85

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment needed is in the trunk. To access the
equipment:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12 for more
information.
2. Press the area at the
front of the handle
located on the cover
so that the back
edge raises.

6-86

3. Grab the handle and
remove the cover.

4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds
the wrench and jack.

The tools to be used are the jack (A) and the wheel
wrench (B).

5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire
from the trunk. See Spare Tire on page 6‑95 for
more information.

6-87

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑85 for more
information.

Be careful not to scratch the aluminum wheel
edge and do not try to remove it with your hands.
Then loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel wrench.
Do not remove them yet.

3. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen them
using the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
2. For models having aluminum wheels with a
center wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel
wrench to gently pry the wheel covers off. Store
the wheel cover and lug nut caps in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

6-88

{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING:
4. Find the jacking location from the diagram above
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the
plastic molding.
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the
rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear
location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the
vehicle.

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the notch
located inboard from the rocker molding.

6-89

5. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.

6. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into
the channel of the jack head.
7. Put the spare tire near you.

6-90

8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
9. Remove all wheel nuts and the flat tire.

10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.

{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.

{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑85.

12. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.

6-91

{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑114 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

6-92

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑114 for the wheel nut
torque specification.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools

{ WARNING:

5-Wheel Nuts

8-Wheel Nuts

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, store
the flat tire in your trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised until
the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
you can.

6-93

A. Cover
B. Wing Nut
C. Retainer
D. Jack and Wheel Wrench
E. Jack Container
F. Spare Tire
G. Bolt
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑12.
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F), face down, making
sure to line up the wheel center hole with the
bolt (G) and place it on the compartment floor.
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).
Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into the
center of the spare tire making sure to line up the
wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the
compartment floor.
4. Secure the spare tire and the jack container with
the retainer (C) and then the wing nut (B).
5. Reinstall the spare tire cover (A).

6-94

Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
This vehicle may have a compact spare tire.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare
tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.

6-95

Spare Tire
This vehicle may have a spare tire, which, when new,
was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air over time, so
check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑59 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑18 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instructions on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑88.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tire originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle's original road tires and wheels in size and type,
do not include the spare in the tire rotation.

6-96

Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.

Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.

A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.

A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.

Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.

Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
.

For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.

For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.

To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
6-97

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.

Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
6-98

change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

TEHAMA™ Leather
The leather surface on the seat was not designed to be
aggressively cleaned using any commercial product.
Use a well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove
dust. Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather
surface with water. Allow the leather to dry naturally. If a
soil occurs that cannot be completely removed, allow it
to become part of the natural markings of the leather.
The leather in the vehicle was designed to have a
natural appearance and develop a more vintage
appearance with use.
Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean
leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers on
leather. It is very important to not use any commercial
leather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather. Not only are those products not
necessary, they will permanently and adversely change
the appearance and feel of the leather. Never use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior.
Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.

Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.

Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑9.

6-99

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. Follow all manufacturers' directions
regarding correct product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle
care product.

6-100

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑100.

Finish Care

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer.

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.

Extreme dusty conditions

Sand and salt

Heat and sun

Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-101

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim

cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,

6-102

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
6-103

Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑114 for the
vehicle's engine code.

Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the spare tire cover, has the following
information:
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Model designation

Paint information

Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

6-104

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑73 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑74.

Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have the headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.

6-105

Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.

6-106

If you ever have a problem on the road and don't
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse cover
and secondary service cover to access the fuse block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.

Fuses
1
2
3
4

Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM), Crank
Fuel Injectors Odd
Fuel Injectors Even
Air Conditioning Clutch

Fuses
5
6
7
8

Usage
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Oxygen Sensor
Emission Device
Transmission, Ignition 1
6-107

Fuses
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

6-108

Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Climate Control System, Instrument
Panel Cluster Ignition 1
Airbag System
Horn
Windshield Wiper
Fog Lamps
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Washer Pump Motor
Left Front Cornering Lamp
Right Front Cornering Lamp
Air Pump (J-Case)
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(J-Case)

Fuses
24

Usage
Starter (J-Case)
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Motor
(J-Case)
Cooling Fan 2 (J-Case)
Cooling Fan 1 (J-Case)

Relays
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Usage
Powertrain
Starter
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 1
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
Ignition
Air Pump

25
26

Rear Underseat Fuse Block
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on
the driver side. The rear seat cushion must be removed
to access the rear fuse block.

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid
contact between the rear seat and the fuse center
whenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat.
Do not remove covers from any of the covered
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.

To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, near
the battery cable.

6-109

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

WARNING: (Continued)
will not be there to work for the next passenger.
The person sitting in that position could be badly
injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always
check to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper
slots in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into the
wire loops on the back frame.

{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is not properly routed through
the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt has
not been routed through the seat cushion at all, it
(Continued)
6-110

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.

Fuses
1
2
3
4

Usage
Fuel Pump
Left Park Lamp
Run 3 - Rear Blower
Right Park Lamp

Fuses
5
6
7

Usage
Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Memory Module
Right Park Lamp (optional)
6-111

Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-112

Usage
Steering Wheel Illumination
Front Heated/Cooled Seat Module
Run 2 - Heated/Cooled Seats
Rear Heated Seat Module
RPA Module
PASS-Key® III System
Unlock/Lock Module
Magnetic Ride Control
Not Used
Sunroof
Body Control Module (BCM) Dim
Body Control Module (BCM)
Run 1-Heated Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
Driver Door Module
Rear Lumbar
Electronic Leveling Control Module
Body Control Module
(Left Turn Signal)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Navigation (Optional)

Fuses
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

Usage
Retained Accessory Power 1 (RAP)
Passenger Door Module
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Accessory Power Outlets
Body Control Module (BCM)
(Inadvertent)
Retained Accessory Power 2 (RAP)
Canister Vent Solenoid
Body Control Module (Courtesy)
Body Control Module
(Right Turn Signal)
Trunk Release
Amplifier, Radio
Body Control Module (CHMSL)
Body Control Module
Stoplamp (optional)
OnStar® Module
Body Modules
Radio
Door Unlatch (optional)
Rear Defogger (J-Case)

Fuses
47
48
49

Resistor
50
Relays
51
52
53
58
59
60
61

Usage
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor (J-Case)
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
Blower (J-Case) (optional)
Usage
Terminating Resistor
Usage
Front Blower (optional)
Rear Defogger
Electronic Leveling Control
Compressor
Park Lamps
Fuel Pump
License Plate Lamp (optional)
Right Park Lamp (optional)

Relays
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Circuit
Breakers
54
55
56
57

Usage
Unlock
Lock
Run
Not Used
Door Unlatch (optional)
Trunk Release
Stoplamp (optional)
Overhead Lamps (optional)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Usage
Right Front Seat
Left Front Power Seat
Power Windows
Power Tilt Steering Wheel

6-113

Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑9 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
12.6 qt
12.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
7.5 qt
7.1 L
Fuel Tank
18.5 gal
70.0 L
Transmission Fluid (Bottom Pan Removal)
7.4 qt
7.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Application

Engine Specifications
Engine
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine
4.6L DOHC V8 Engine

6-114

VIN Code
Y
9

Transmission
Automatic
Automatic

Spark Plug Gap
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
0.050 in (1.27 mm)

Section 7

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2
7-2
7-3
7-7

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7-1

Maintenance Schedule

The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
.

carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑18.

are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑5.

Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer/retailer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.

7-2

{ WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑4.

At your dealer/retailer, you can be certain that you
will receive the highest level of service available.
Your dealer/retailer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine replacement parts, as well
as, up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and
accurate diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑9 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑11. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service
for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑67.

Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service technicians who will
perform this work and reset the system. If the engine
oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service.
Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.

7-3

Every Engine Oil Change

Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps
and replacement, if needed.

Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated.
See Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑101.
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑48.

Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
console hinges, and glove box door hinges
lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑9. More frequent
lubrication may be required when vehicle
is exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth makes them last longer,
seal better, and not stick or squeak.

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.

Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑26.

Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.

Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑59.

Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑67.

Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑67.

Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system
must be repaired and the fluid level checked.

Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.

Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).

Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑75.

Automatic transmission fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.

7-4

Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear.

Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15.

Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6‑24.

Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑26.

Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.

Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.

Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.

Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.

Once a Month
.

Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑59.

First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.

Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.

Passenger compartment air filter replacement
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
More frequent replacement may be required if
vehicle is driven regularly under dusty conditions.

Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑67.

Once a Year
.

Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑7.

Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑7.

Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑7.

Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑7.

First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.

Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.

Automatic transmission fluid and filter change
(severe service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
7-5

First Engine Oil Change After Every
120 000 km/75,000 Miles
.

Professional Vehicle Only: Engine cooling system
drain, flush, and refill, cooling system and cap
pressure check, and cleaning of outside of radiator
and air conditioning condenser (or every 5 years,
whichever occurs first). See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑26. An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.

Automatic transmission fluid and filter change
(normal service). See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 6‑21.

Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.

7-6

First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.

Except Professional Vehicle: Engine cooling
system drain, flush, and refill, cooling system and
cap pressure check, and cleaning of outside of
radiator and air conditioning condenser (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Coolant on page 6‑26. An Emission Control
Service.

Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.

Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑30.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑30.

Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer for service.

Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.

7-7

Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.

The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
the shift lever is in P (Park).

The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park)
Mechanism Check

{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.

7-8

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
.

To check the parking brake's holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.

To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.

Contact your dealer if service is required.

Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage

Engine Oil

Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
see Engine Oil on page 6‑15.

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑26.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in
System
Canada 88862807).
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Parking Brake
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

7-9

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl

7-10

Usage

Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
Conditioning
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part

GM Part Number
22676970
89017342
25906375
12571535

ACDelco Part Number
A1627C
PF61
CF118C
41–987

Driver Side ‐ 21.7 in (55.0 cm)

15931977

—

Passenger Side ‐ 21.7 in (55.0 cm)

15931976

—

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades

7-11

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.6L V8 Engines

7-12

Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

7-13

Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date

7-14

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

7-15

Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date

7-16

Odometer
Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance Stamp

Services Performed

Section 8

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance
for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . .
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-16
8-16
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-20
8-20
8-20

8-1

Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the
following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.

8-2

STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.

.
.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
Dealership name and location.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why
we suggest following Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.

8-3

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
General Motors Participation in the Mediation/
Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors
of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration
program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.

8-4

For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General
Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Online Owner Center

My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac

My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.

Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
.

Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more

Online service and maintenance records

Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide

Exclusive privileges and offers

Recall notices for your specific vehicle

OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries

Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter
.

FAQ

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.

My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.

My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.

My Driveway: Access quick links to parts
and service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.

My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.

8-5

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment available
at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY
user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing:
1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:

United States — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

8-6

From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program

The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
8-7

Calling for Assistance

Coverage

When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:

Services are provided up to 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.

Your name, home address, and home telephone
number

Telephone number of your location

Location of the vehicle

Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle

Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

Description of the problem

8-8

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™
.

Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.

Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.

Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.

Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered
by the warranty.

Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.

Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.

Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If
your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the
5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.

8-9

Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)

Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Service is more
than an auto club or towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States with the advantage
of contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.

Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.

Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.

A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and
tools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests
per year.

Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make
arrangements and explain how to receive payment.

Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.

Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.

Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.

Legal fines.

Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.

Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.

8-10

Scheduling Service Appointments

Courtesy Transportation Program

When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and advising your service
consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can
help minimize your inconvenience.

To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.

Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.

8-11

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:

Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of your
daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer's shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S.
customers, should you arrange transportation through a

8-12

friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the
allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see
your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed
and the allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement
must be supported by original receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement and
meet state, local, and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.

Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to

ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your
GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.

8-13

Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state of
the art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained technicians and
comparable equipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.

8-14

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for
help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters
have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other
parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Service on
page 8‑7

Gather the following information:
.

Driver's name, address, phone number

Driver's license number

Owner's name, address, phone number

Vehicle license plate

Vehicle make, model and model year

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Insurance company and policy number

General description of the damage to the
other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality
replacement parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier
in this section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? on page 2‑66.

Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired
with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance
coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
8-15

Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-16

Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000, or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.

Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.

8-17

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time

Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy

For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com

Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as
radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

8-18

Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
.

How various systems in your vehicle were
operating

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened

How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal

How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

8-19

OnStar®
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions in the OnStar Owners Guide for information
on data collection and use.

Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.

Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and

8-20

starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.

Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.

A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-66
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Antenna
Backglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Speaker Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Wood Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Ashtray(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

i-1

Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

B
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Inadvertent Power Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

i-2

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Bulb Replacement
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Center Flex Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Central Door Unlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106

Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Speaker Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Wood Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Climate Control System
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Climate Control Systems
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

i-3

Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Engine Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Cruise Control, Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

i-4

D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Door
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Driving (cont.)
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Dual Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

E
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Electrical System
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-106
Rear Underseat Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

i-5

F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Footwell Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

i-6

Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Rear Underseat Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105

G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

H
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Heated
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Heater
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
High-Speed Operation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-26
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

i-7

K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Lamps
Cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Lane Departure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

i-8

Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lockout Switch, Valet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Locks
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Lumbar
Massaging Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Lumbar Controls, Rear Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Massaging Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .2-6
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

i-9

Object Detection, Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 3-43
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Operation, Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . 3-49
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 6-32
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Park Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Parking
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-4
Performance Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Phone
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

i - 10

Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column . . . . . . . . 4-4
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4

R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

i - 11

Reclining Seatbacks, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

i - 12

S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Seats
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Heated Seats - Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Massaging Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Memory, Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Seats (cont.)
Power Lumbar, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Center Flex Storage Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Front Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

i - 13

Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . .
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-84
5-17
3-17
3-57

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel . . . . . .4-4
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

i - 14

Tires (cont.)
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77, 6-84
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5

U
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist
(UFRPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

V
Valet Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-104
Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

i - 15

W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

i - 16

Windshield
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Wiper Activated Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2009:12:09 12:48:17-05:00
Creator                         : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode
Modify Date                     : 2010:01:14 15:05:05-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:01:14 15:05:05-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 00-OI-Preface 1..6
Document ID                     : uuid:a1e87e51-1b1c-4a7d-bb17-b71f6c10d042
Instance ID                     : uuid:bebb859a-40a6-4068-995d-b75e6492d92c
Producer                        : Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.490/W Unicode
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 486

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Cadillac 2010 DTS 00 OI Preface 1..6 User Manual To The 7754863a 4b3e 4d3c B349 0590a66d91c4

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation